PENTAX WG-10 Digital Camera Operating Manual
Oglas
Oglas
Cover_WG10_ENG.fm Page i Monday, February 4, 2013 4:04 PM
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD.
2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN
(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
FRANCE S.A.S.
(European Headquarters)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,
FRANCE
(HQ - http://www.pentax.eu)
(France - http://www.pentax.fr)
Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,
GERMANY
(http://www.pentax.de)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
UK LTD.
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
AMERICAS CORPORATION
633 17th Street, Suite 2600, Denver, Colorado 80202,
U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
CANADA INC.
PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough,
Berks SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
CHINA CO., LTD.
1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,
CANADA
(http://www.pentax.ca)
23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang
Road, Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032, CHINA
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
OPWG10201-ENG Copyright © PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD. 2013
FOM 01.02.2013 Printed in Europe
Digital Camera
Operating Manual
To ensure the best performance from your camera, please read the Operating Manual before using the camera.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 0 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX WG-10.
Please read this manual before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions. Keep this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all the camera’s capabilities.
Regarding copyrights
Images taken using the PENTAX Digital Camera that are for anything other than personal enjoyment cannot be used without permission according to the rights as specified in the Copyright Act. Please take care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking pictures even for personal enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items on display. Images taken with the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be used outside the scope of use of the copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and care should be taken here also.
Regarding trademarks
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America and other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• ArcSoft ® , and its logo are either the registered trademark or trademark of ArcSoft Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and/or other countries.
• Eye-Fi, the Eye-Fi logo, and Eye-Fi connected are trademarks of Eye-Fi, Inc.
• Intel, Intel Core and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• AMD, AMD Athlon and ATI Radeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
• NVIDIA and GeForce are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA
Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled digital still cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce images more faithful to their intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not PRINT Image Matching III compliant.
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Regarding Product Registration
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration, which can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX website. Thank you for your cooperation.
Refer to “Product Registration on the Internet” (p.246) for more information.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 1 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To users of this camera
• Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields.
Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage the stored data, or affect the product’s internal circuitry and cause camera misoperation.
• The liquid crystal panel used in the display is manufactured using extremely high precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.
• A band of light may appear on the display if the camera is aimed at a bright subject. This is known as a smear, but it is not a malfunction.
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen in this manual are different from the actual product.
• In this manual, SD Memory Cards, SDHC Memory Cards and SDXC Memory
Cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards.
• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or a Macintosh hereafter.
• In this manual, the term “battery(ies)” refers to any type of batteries used for this camera and accessories.
Using Your Camera Safely
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When using this product, we request your special attention regarding items marked with the following symbols.
Warning
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause serious personal injuries.
Caution
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause minor or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.
1
2
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 2 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
About the Camera
Warning
• Do not attempt to take the camera apart or modify the camera.
High voltages are present within the camera, and there is a danger of electric shock if the camera is taken apart.
• If the inside of the camera should become exposed as a result of, for example, the camera being dropped, please do not under any circumstances touch such exposed portions, as there is a danger of receiving an electric shock.
• Wrapping the strap of the camera around your neck is also dangerous.
Please take care that small children do not hang the strap around their necks.
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
Caution
• Do not place your finger on the flash when it is discharging as there is a risk of burns.
• Do not discharge the flash while it is touching your clothing as there is a risk of discoloring.
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use, so please take care, as there is a risk of low temperature burns if such portions are held for long periods of time.
• Should the LCD be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin, in your eyes, or in your mouth.
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the camera may cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality, stop using the camera and get medical attention immediately.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 3 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
About the Battery Charger and the AC Adapter
Warning
• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for this product, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC adapter not exclusive to this product, or using the exclusive battery charger or AC adapter with an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric shock, or camera breakdown. The specified voltage is 100-240V AC.
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electric shock.
• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality occurs, immediately discontinue its use and consult a PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX
Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
• If a thunder storm should occur while using the battery charger or AC adapter, unplug the AC plug cord and discontinue use. Continuing to use the product can cause damage to the equipment, fire, or electric shock.
• Wipe off the plug of the AC plug cord if it becomes covered with dust.
Dust on the plug may cause a fire.
Caution
• Do not place heavy objects on the AC plug cord, allow heavy objects to drop onto it or allow the AC plug cord to become damaged due to excessive bending. If the AC plug cord becomes damaged, consult a PENTAX Service Center.
• Do not short or touch the output terminals of the product while it is still plugged in.
• Do not plug in the AC plug cord with wet hands. This can cause an electric shock.
• Do not subject the product to strong impacts or allow it to drop onto a hard surface. This can cause a malfunction.
• Do not use the battery charger to charge a battery other than a rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI92. This can cause overheating, explosion, or battery charger failure.
3
4
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 4 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only a CSA/UL certified power supply cord set, cord is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-on male attachment plug cap (with a specified
NEMA configuration), and the other is provided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial type configuration) or the equivalent.
About the Battery
Warning
• Be sure to store the battery out of the reach of small children. Placing it in their mouths may cause an electric shock.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, it may cause a loss of sight. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately. Do not rub them.
Caution
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may cause an explosion or fire.
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an explosion or leakage.
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins to smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts of the battery.
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an explosion or fire.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.
• Precautions for D-LI92 Battery Usage:
BATTERY MAY EXPLODE OR FIRE IF MISTREATED.
- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR DISPOSE OF IN FIRE.
- DO NOT CHARGE EXCEPT SPECIFIED CHARGING CONDITION.
- DO NOT HEAT ABOVE 140°F / 60°C, OR SHORT CIRCUIT.
- DO NOT CRUSH OR MODIFY.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 5 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Keep the Camera and Accessories Out of the Reach of Small Children
Warning
• Be sure to keep the camera and its accessories out of the reach of small children.
1. Injuries may result from the product falling or from unexpected movement.
2. Suffocation may result from wrapping the strap around the neck.
3. Small accessories such as battery or an SD Memory Card may be swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if an accessory is accidentally swallowed.
Care to be Taken During Handling
Before Starting Use
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included in the package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or when traveling). Contents of the recording cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback or transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of your camera or recording media
(SD Memory Card), etc.
• The lens on this camera is not interchangeable. The lens is not removable.
About the Battery and Battery Charger
• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance.
Avoid storing it especially in high temperatures.
• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the battery will over-discharge and shorten the battery’s service life.
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.
• The AC plug cord supplied with the camera is for exclusive use with the battery charger D-BC92. Do not use it with any other equipment.
5
6
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 6 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Cautions when Carrying and Using the Camera
• Hot and humid places should be avoided. Particular care should be taken regarding vehicles, which can become very hot inside.
• Ensure that the camera is not subjected to substantial vibrations, shocks, or pressure as this may cause damage, malfunction, or a loss in waterproof performance. Place the camera on a cushion for protection when the camera is subjected to the vibrations of a motorbike, car, ship, etc. If the camera is subjected to substantial vibrations, shocks, or pressure, take your camera to your nearest PENTAX Service Center and have it checked.
• The temperature range in which the camera can be used is -10°C to 40°C
(14°F to 104°F).
• The liquid crystal display will become black at high temperatures but will return to normal at normal temperatures.
• The response speed of the liquid crystal display becomes slow at low temperatures. This is due to the properties of the liquid crystal and is not a malfunction.
• If the camera is subjected to rapid temperature changes, condensation may form on the inside and outside of the camera. Therefore put the camera in a bag or plastic bag and take the camera out when the difference in temperature has subsided.
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salts.
These could cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off any rain or water drops.
• Please do not press forcefully on the display. This could cause it to break or malfunction.
• Be careful not to sit down with the camera in your back pocket as this may damage the exterior of the camera or the display.
• When using a tripod with the camera, be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket on the camera.
About Repairs
• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol or benzene.
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens. Never use a spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 7 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
About Storage
• Avoid storing the camera where pesticides and chemicals are handled.
Remove the camera from its case and store it in a well-ventilated place to prevent the camera from becoming moldy during storage.
• Avoid using or storing the camera where it may be exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
• Avoid using or storing the camera in direct sunlight or in locations where it may be exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.
• Periodic checks are recommended every 1 to 2 years in order to maintain high performance.
Others
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a write-protect switch. Setting the switch to LOCK prevents new data from being recorded on the card, the stored data from being deleted, and the card from being formatted by the camera or computer.
Write-protect switch r appears on the display when the card is write-protected.
• Care should be taken when removing the SD Memory Card immediately after using the camera, as the card may be hot.
• Keep the battery/card cover closed and do not remove the SD Memory
Card or turn the camera off while the data is being played back or saved to the card, or the camera is connected to a computer with the USB cable, as this may cause the data to be lost or the card to be damaged.
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact.
Keep it away from water and store away from high temperature.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card during formatting as this may damage the card and render it unusable.
• The data on the SD Memory Card may be lost in the following circumstances. We do not accept any liability for data that is deleted
(1) when the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.
(2) when the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
(3) when the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.
(4) when the SD Memory Card is ejected or the batteries are removed while the card is being accessed.
7
8
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 8 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• If it is not used for a long time, the data on the card may become unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on a computer.
• Be sure to format SD Memory Cards that are unused or have been used on another camera. Refer to
“ Formatting the Memory ” (p.214) .
• Please note that deleting data, or formatting the SD Memory Cards or the built-in memory does not completely erase the original data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered using commercially available software.
It is user’s responsibility to ensure the privacy of such data.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 9 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Regarding Waterproof, Dustproof, and
Shockproof Design
• This camera is provided with a waterproof/dustproof design complying with
JIS waterproof grade 8 and JIS dustproof grade 6 (equivalent to IP68).
• The camera satisfies the PENTAX drop test (1.5 m height onto a 5 cm thick plywood surface) complying with MIL-Standard 810F Method 516.5-Shock testing.
• The camera satisfies the PENTAX test for the waterproof, dustproof, and shockproof performance, but this does not guarantee it will remain free of trouble or damages.
• Waterproof performance is not guaranteed if the camera is exposed to impact such as being dropped or hit.
Precautions Before Using the Camera in the Water
Check the Following Before Going Near the Water
• Make sure that there are no cracks or scratches on the rubber seal of the battery/card and terminal covers.
Packing contact surface Waterproof packing
Packing contact surface
Waterproof packing
• Make sure there are no foreign objects (dust, sand, hair, lint or liquid) on the rubber seals or the surface they contact before closing the battery/card and terminal covers. Wipe off any foreign objects with a clean lint-free cloth.
9
10
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 10 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• Close the battery/card and terminal covers properly until they click.
Otherwise water may get in and damage the camera.
Be Careful Near the Water
• Avoid opening the battery/card and terminal covers when near the waterside or with wet hands. Wait until the camera is completely dry before changing the battery or the SD Memory Card. Avoid changing the battery or card where the camera is likely to get wet or dirty, and make sure that your hands are dry.
• The camera will sink if dropped in water, so be sure to attach the strap and slip the strap over your wrist when using the camera in or near water.
• To enhance the waterproof performance of the camera, the front of the lens is protected by glass. As any dirt or water on the glass will affect the quality of pictures taken, the glass should be kept clean at all times.
Precautions When Using the Camera in the Water
• Do not use the camera deeper than 10 meters underwater. Do not use the camera underwater for more than 120 minutes consecutively.
• Do not open the battery/card and terminal covers underwater.
• Do not use in hot water or in a hot spring.
• Do not apply excessive force to the camera, for example diving into water with it. Doing so may compromise the waterproof performance of the camera or cause the covers to open.
• Leaving the camera on the sand at the beach may cause the camera to exceed its operating temperature or cause the speaker or microphone to become blocked with sand.
• Avoid subjecting the camera to substantial vibrations, shocks, or pressure as this may cause a loss in waterproof performance. If the camera is subjected to substantial vibrations, shocks or pressure, take your camera to your nearest PENTAX Service Center and have it checked.
• Avoid getting sunscreen or sun oil on the camera as it may cause discoloration of the surface. If any oil gets on the camera, wash it off immediately with warm water.
• Sudden and extreme changes in temperature may cause condensation to form in and on the camera. Keep the camera in a bag or case to reduce the difference in temperature.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 11 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Precautions After Using the Camera in the Water
• Do not open the battery/card cover or terminal cover if the camera is wet.
Wipe off any water with a clean lint-free cloth.
• The inside surface of the covers may get wet when they are opened.
Wipe off any water that is on the cover.
• Wiping off the camera while there is sand or dust on it may scratch the surface of the camera. Make sure that the battery/card cover and terminal cover are firmly closed before washing the camera in tap water.
After washing the camera, dry it with a soft cloth.
• Wipe off any dirt or sand on the waterproof packing or the packing contact surface. The camera’s waterproof performance may be compromised by loose packing or cracks or dents in the packing or packing contact surface.
If there is any such damage, contact your nearest PENTAX Service Center.
• If the camera is very dirty or after it has been used in the sea, make sure that it is turned off and the battery/card and terminal covers are firmly closed before rinsing it under running tap water or leaving it in a bowl of clean water for a short time (2 or 3 minutes).
• Avoid cleaning with agents such as soapy water, mild detergents, or alcohol as this may compromise the waterproof performance of the camera.
• To maintain the waterproof performance of the camera, you are recommended to change the waterproof packing once a year. Contact your nearest PENTAX Service Center regarding changing the packing.
(A charge will be made.)
• The camera’s accessories are not waterproof.
11
12
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 12 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Contents
Using Your Camera Safely ...............................................................1
Care to be Taken During Handling ...................................................5
Regarding Waterproof, Dustproof, and Shockproof Design................... 9
Precautions Before Using the Camera in the Water.........................9
Precautions When Using the Camera in the Water........................10
Precautions After Using the Camera in the Water..........................11
Contents .........................................................................................12
Composition of the Operating Manual ............................................19
Checking the Contents of the Package ..........................................20
Names of Parts...............................................................................21
Names of Operating Parts ..............................................................22
Monitor Indications .........................................................................23
Attaching the Strap .........................................................................32
Powering the Camera .......................................................................... 33
Charging the Battery.......................................................................33
Installing the Battery .......................................................................34
Using the AC Adapter.....................................................................38
Installing the SD Memory Card ............................................................ 40
Number of Images Recordable on an SD Memory Card................42
Turning the Camera On and Off........................................................... 43
Starting-up in the Playback Mode...................................................44
Setting the Display Language.........................................................45
Setting the Date and Time..............................................................49
Understanding the Button Functions.................................................... 52
Mode .........................................................................................52
Mode ........................................................................................54
A Mode and Q Mode...................................56
Setting the Camera Functions.............................................................. 57
Operating the Menus ......................................................................57
Menu List ........................................................................................61
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 13 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Taking Pictures...............................................................................65
Setting the Shooting Mode .............................................................69
Using the Face Detection Function ................................................71
Taking Pictures Automatically (Auto Picture Mode) .......................75
Setting the Functions (Program Mode)...........................................76
Taking Pictures in the Basic Mode (Green Mode)..........................77
Using the Zoom ..............................................................................79
Taking Pictures of Dark Scenes
(Night Scene, Night Scene Portrait, Digital SR,
Fireworks, and Candlelight Modes)..........................................81
Taking Pictures of People (Portrait Mode)......................................83
Taking Pictures of Children (Kids Mode) ........................................84
Taking Pictures of Your Pet (Pet Mode) .........................................85
Taking Pictures of Sports and Leisure Activities
(Surf & Snow/Sport Mode) .......................................................88
Taking Pictures of Text (Text Mode) ..............................................89
Taking Pictures in Digital Microscope Mode...................................90
Framing Your Pictures (Frame Composite Mode)..........................92
Using the Self-timer ........................................................................94
(Continuous Shooting/Burst Shooting).....................................95
Taking Pictures Using the Remote Control Unit (Optional) ............97
Taking Pictures at a Set Interval (Interval Shoot) ...........................99
Taking Pictures with Automatic Exposure Adjustment
(Auto Bracketing) ...................................................................101
Using the Digital Wide Function (Digital Wide Mode)...................102
Taking Panoramic Pictures (Digital Panorama Mode)..................105
Setting the Shooting Functions .......................................................... 108
Selecting the Flash Mode .............................................................108
Selecting the Focus Mode ............................................................110
Setting the Image Tone ................................................................115
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels....................................116
Selecting the Quality Level of Still Pictures ..................................118
Adjusting the White Balance.........................................................119
Setting the AE Metering................................................................121
Setting the Sensitivity ...................................................................122
Setting AUTO ISO Range.............................................................123
Setting the Exposure (EV Compensation)....................................124
Correcting the Brightness (D-Range Setting) ...............................125
Setting Pixel Track SR..................................................................126
Setting the Interval Shooting ........................................................127
13
14
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 14 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting Blink Detection .................................................................129
Setting the Instant Review............................................................130
Setting the Green Button ..............................................................130
Setting the Image Sharpness (Sharpness)...................................134
Setting the Saturation/Tone Adjustment.......................................135
Setting the Image Contrast (Contrast)..........................................136
Setting the Date Imprint Function .................................................136
Setting the IQ Enhancer Processing ............................................137
Setting the Macro Light.................................................................138
Taking Pictures Underwater............................................................... 139
(Underwater Mode/Underwater Movie Mode) ........................139
Recording Movies .............................................................................. 141
Recording Movies.........................................................................141
Setting the Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction) Function............144
Recording a Movie from Pictures Taken at a Set Interval
(Interval Movie) ......................................................................145
Saving the Settings (Memory)............................................................ 149
Playing Back and Deleting Images 151
Playing Back Images.......................................................................... 151
Playing Back Still Pictures ............................................................151
Playing Back a Movie ...................................................................152
Multi-Image Display ......................................................................153
Using the Playback Function ........................................................155
Slideshow .....................................................................................158
Rotating the Image .......................................................................161
Zoom Playback.............................................................................162
Zoom In on the Subject’s Face Automatically
(Face Close-up Playback)......................................................163
Deleting Images and Sound Files ...................................................... 165
Deleting a Single Image/Sound File .............................................165
Deleting Selected Images and Sound Files..................................167
Deleting All Images and Sound Files............................................168
Protecting Images and Sound Files from Deletion (Protect) ........169
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment ......................................... 172
Connecting the Camera to a Video IN Jack .................................172
Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal .............................174
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 15 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Editing and Printing Images 176
Changing the Image Size (Resize)...............................................176
Cropping Images ..........................................................................177
Processing Images to Make Faces Look Smaller ........................178
Using the Digital Filters.................................................................180
Using the Ink Rubbing Filter .........................................................185
Creating a Collage Image.............................................................186
Red-eye Compensation................................................................191
Adding a Frame (Frame Composite) ............................................192
Overlaying Your Original Frame on an Image ..............................195
Editing Movies ..............................................................................200
Copying Images and Sound Files.................................................203
Setting the Printing Service (DPOF) .................................................. 205
Printing a Single Image ................................................................205
Printing All Images........................................................................207
Recording and Playing Back Sound 208
Recording Sound (Voice Recording Mode)........................................ 208
Setting Voice Recording ...............................................................208
Recording Sounds ........................................................................209
Playing Back Sound .....................................................................210
Adding a Voice Memo to Images ....................................................... 212
Recording a Voice Memo .............................................................212
Playing Back a Voice Memo.........................................................213
Camera Settings ................................................................................ 214
Formatting the Memory ................................................................214
Changing the Sound Settings.......................................................215
Changing the Date and Time........................................................217
Setting the Alarm ..........................................................................219
Setting the World Time .................................................................221
Setting the Text Size on the Menu ...............................................224
Changing the Display Language ..................................................225
Changing the System for Naming Folders....................................226
Changing the Video Output Format..............................................228
Selecting the HDMI Output Format ..............................................229
Setting the Eye-Fi Communication ...............................................231
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display ........................................232
Using the Power Saving Function ................................................233
15
16
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 16 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting Auto Power Off .................................................................234
Setting the Quick Zoom Function .................................................235
Setting the Guide Display .............................................................236
Perform Pixel Mapping .................................................................237
Changing the Start-up Screen ......................................................238
Resetting to Default Settings (Reset) ...........................................239
Displaying the Clock Mode ...........................................................240
Connecting to a Computer ................................................................. 241
Provided Software ........................................................................241
System Requirements ..................................................................242
Installing the Software ..................................................................244
Setting the USB Connection Mode...............................................247
Connecting to a Windows PC ............................................................ 249
Connecting the Camera and Your Windows PC ..........................249
Transferring Images .....................................................................250
Disconnecting the Camera from Your Windows PC.....................253
Starting “MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE” ............................................254
Viewing Images ............................................................................256
Details on How to Use “MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE”.....................257
Connecting to a Macintosh................................................................. 258
Connecting the Camera and Your Macintosh...............................258
Transferring Images .....................................................................259
Disconnecting the Camera from Your Macintosh .........................260
Starting “MediaImpression 2.2 LE” ...............................................261
Viewing Images ............................................................................263
Details on How to Use “MediaImpression 2.2 LE”........................263
Transferring Images Using an Eye-Fi Card........................................ 264
Functions Available for Each Shooting Mode .................................... 266
List of World Time Cities .................................................................... 278
Main Specifications ............................................................................ 279
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 17 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
In this manual, the method for operating the four-way controller is shown in illustrations, such as in the one below.
2 or
or 4 5 or
3 or
The meanings of the symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.
1 Indicates the reference page number for an explanation of the related operation.
Indicates information that is useful to know.
A Mode
Q Mode
Indicates precautions to be taken when operating the camera.
This is the mode for taking still pictures and recording movies.
In this manual, "Still Picture Capture Mode" is the mode for taking still pictures.
This is the mode for viewing still pictures and playing back movies and sound files.
17
18
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 18 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Memo
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 19 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Composition of the Operating Manual
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.
1 Getting Started ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains what you need to do after purchasing the camera before you start taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the instructions.
2 Common Operations –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains common operations such as the functions of the buttons and how to use the menus. For more details, refer to the respective chapters below.
3 Taking Pictures ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains the various ways of capturing images and how to set the relevant functions.
4 Playing Back and Deleting Images –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains how to view still pictures and movies on the camera or on a TV and how to delete images, sound files, and movies from the camera.
5 Editing and Printing Images –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains the various ways of printing still pictures and how to edit images with the camera.
6 Recording and Playing Back Sound ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains how to record sound files or add sound (a voice memo) to an image and how to play back sound files.
7 Settings–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains how to set camera-related functions.
8 Connecting to a Computer ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains how to connect the camera to a computer, and includes installation instructions and a general overview of the provided software.
9 Appendix –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter deals with troubleshooting and lists the optional accessories.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19
20
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 20 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Checking the Contents of the Package
Camera
PENTAX WG-10
Strap
O-ST104 (*)
Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW136
USB cable
I-USB7 (*)
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI92 (*)
Battery charger
D-BC92 (*)
Operating Manual
(this manual)
Quick Guide
AC plug cord (*) Macro stand
O-MS1
Items marked with an asterisk (*) are also available as optional accessories.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 21 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Names of Parts
Front
Power switch/Power lamp (green)
Lens (with guard glass)
Shutter release button
Flash
Speaker/
Microphone
Remote control receiver
Self timer lamp/
Focus assist
Macro light
Back
Terminal cover
Terminal cover lock lever
Display
Tripod socket
Battery/card cover lock lever
Battery/card cover
PC/AV terminal HDMI terminal Battery lock lever
21
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 22 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Names of Operating Parts
Power switch
Shutter release button w / x / f / y button
Q
button
I button
Four-way controller
4 / W button
Green/ i button
3 button
Refer to “Understanding the Button Functions” (p.52 - 55) for an
explanation of the function of each button.
Macro stand
Attaching the supplied macro stand (O-MS1) reduces camera shake during
shooting in Digital Microscope mode (p.90). Insert two clips above and below
the macro lights part. When attaching and detaching the macro stand, do not hold the clip part.
22
* When using the macro stand, the camera may not be able to focus if the objects have asperities.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 23 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Monitor Indications
Display in A Mode
The display changes in the following sequence each time you press the 4/W button: “Normal Display”, “Histogram + Info”, “No Info”,
“LCD Off”.
• All the camera buttons function as normal even when the LCD is off.
Press the shutter release button to take pictures as normal.
• Y appears if you press the shutter release button halfway when camera shake is likely to occur. To prevent the camera from shaking, use a tripod, a remote controller (optional) and/or the self-timer
• You cannot turn off the LCD in
N
(Frame Composite), e
(Pet) and F (Digital Panorama) mode.
• You cannot change the information on the display by pressing the 4 /
W button in 9 (Green) mode or
X
(Digital Wide) mode.
• In (Digital Microscope) mode, the 4 / W button only switches between the Normal display and the No Info display.
Normal Display Histogram + Info
OK
38
OK
38 14 M
OK
OK
LCD Off No Info
23
24
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 24 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Normal Display in Still Picture Capture Mode
11 12 13 14 15
1
2
3
4
9
10
7
8
5
6
P
DATE
+ 1 . 0
1 / 2 5 0
F 3 . 5
3 8
16
17
18 19
2 Battery level indicator (p.37)
4 Date Imprint setting (p.136)
6 Shutter speed
7 Aperture
14 Eye-Fi communication
15 Digital Zoom/Intelligent
10 Remaining image storage capacity
* 6 and 7 are only displayed when the shutter release button is pressed half-way.
* For 8, M is displayed when Pixel Track SR is set to O (On) on the [ A Rec. Mode] menu. f is displayed when the shutter release button is pressed halfway if Pixel Track SR is set to P (Off) and there is a danger of camera shake.
* For 13, when the focus mode is set to = and the Auto Macro function is activated, the q
appears on the display (p.110).
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 25 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
* 14 changes as follows depending on the [Eye-Fi] setting in [ W Setting] menu.
During Eye-Fi communication. The camera is communicating or searching for the access point when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication waiting. The camera is not communicating when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication prohibited. [Eye-Fi] is set to P (off).
Eye-Fi version error. The version of the Eye-Fi card is out of date.
* 17 disappears two seconds after the camera is turned on.
* 19 depends on the [D-Range Setting] setting in the [ A Rec. Mode] menu.
P When [Highlight Correction] is set to O
Q When [Shadow Correction] is set to O
O When [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both set to O
If [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both set to
P (Off), nothing appears in 19.
* Some indications may not appear depending on the shooting mode.
25
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 26 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
26
Histogram + Info/No Info Display in Still Picture Capture Mode
A1 to A21 and B3 appear when “Histogram + Info” is selected. Only B3 appears when “No Info” is selected.
A9 A10 A11 A12 A13
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
A6
A7
A8
P
DATE
+ 1 . 0
1 / 2 5 0
F 3 . 5
3 8 14M
B3
A14
A15
A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21
A2 Battery level indicator (p.37)
A4 Date Imprint setting (p.136)
A6 Pixel Track SR icon (p.126)
A8 Remaining image storage capacity
A12 Eye-Fi communication status (p.231)
A13 Digital Zoom/Intelligent Zoom icon
A16 World time setting
B1 Shutter speed
B2 Aperture
* For A6, M is displayed when Pixel Track SR is set to O (On) on the [ A Rec. Mode] menu. f is displayed when the shutter release button is pressed halfway if Pixel Track SR is set to P (Off) and there is a danger of camera shake.
* On the No Info display, A6 is displayed for two seconds after turning on the camera, setting the Pixel Track SR to ON, or turning the camera to capture mode.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 27 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
* A12 changes as follows depending on the [Eye-Fi] setting in
[ W Setting] menu.
During Eye-Fi communication. The camera is communicating or searching for the access point when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication waiting. The camera is not communicating when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication prohibited. [Eye-Fi] is set to P (off).
Eye-Fi version error. The version of the Eye-Fi card is out of date.
* A17 depends on the [D-Range Setting] setting in the [ A Rec. Mode] menu.
P When [Highlight Correction] is set to O
Q When [Shadow Correction] is set to O
O When [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both set to O
If [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both set to P (Off), nothing appears in A17.
* B1 and B2 are only displayed when the shutter release button is pressed half-way.
* When the shooting mode is b (Auto Picture) and if you press the shutter release button halfway, the automatically selected shooting
mode appears in A1 even when “No Info” is selected (p.75).
* Some indications may not appear depending on the shooting mode.
* When there is an area on the screen that is overexposed it appears white, the indicated area blinks red as a warning. Similarly, when there is an area that is underexposed it appears black, the indicated area blinks yellow as a warning.
27
28
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 28 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Display in Q Mode
The display shows the shooting information of the image in the playback mode. The display changes in the following sequence each time you press the 4 / W button:
The display cannot be changed by pressing the 4 / W button while playing back a voice memo/movie or pausing playback.
Normal Display Histogram + Info
OK
Edit
1 / 2 5 0
F 3 . 5
Edit
OK OK
Edit
No Info
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 29 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Histogram + Info Display in Playback Mode
(All of the display items are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)
The display shows information such as the shooting conditions.
A1 to A11 also appear when “Normal Display” is selected. B1 to B8 appear only when “Histogram + Info” is selected.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
A6
1 / 2 5 0
F 3 . 5
Edit
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
B3
B4
B5 B6 B7 B8
A2 Playback mode
Q
K
L
A3 Battery level indicator (p.37)
A6 Four-way controller guide
A7 File number
A10 Eye-Fi communication
A11 Volume icon
B1 Shutter speed
B2 Aperture
* A1 appears only if the Face Detection function worked when the image was shot.
* In “Normal Display”, A3 disappears if no operation is performed for two seconds.
* A6 appears even when “No Info” is selected, but disappears if no operation is performed for two seconds. When no operation is performed for two seconds in “Normal Display” or “Histogram + Info”, only “Edit” disappears.
29
30
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 30 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
* A11 appears only when the volume is being adjusted during playback
of movies, sounds, or voice memos (p.152, p.210, p.213).
* When “Normal Display” is selected, the current date and time appears for two seconds in the B4 to B8 positions.
* When there is an area on the screen that is overexposed it appears white, the indicated area blinks red. Similarly, when there is an area that is underexposed it appears black, the indicated area blinks yellow.
Guide Display
A guide for each available button operation appears as follows on the display during operation.
2
3
4
5
MENU
Four-way controller ( 2 )
Four-way controller (
3
)
Four-way controller (
4
)
Four-way controller ( 5 )
3 button
O K
S HUTTER
X , i
I , J
Zoom button
4 / W button
Shutter release button
Green/ i button
I button
Histogram
A histogram shows the brightness distribution of an image. The horizontal axis represents brightness (dark at the left and bright at the right) and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels.
The shape of the histogram before and after shooting tells
(Dark) ← Brightness →
Dark portions
(Bright)
Bright portions you whether the brightness and contrast are correct or not, and lets you decide if you need to use EV compensation and take the picture again.
Setting the Exposure (EV Compensation)
1
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 31 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Understanding Brightness
If the brightness is correct, the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is underexposed, the peak is on the left side, and if it is overexposed, the peak is on the right side.
Dark image Correct image Bright image
When the image is underexposed, the part to the left is cut off
(dark portions) and when the image is overexposed, the part to the right is cut off (bright portions).
This camera has a function where overexposed areas are indicated as blinking red and underexposed areas as blinking yellow.
Understanding Contrast
The graph peaks gradually for images in which contrast is balanced.
The graph peaks on both sides but sinks in the middle for images with a large difference in contrast and low amounts of mid-level brightness.
31
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 32 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Attaching the Strap
1
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap (O-ST104) supplied with the camera.
1Getting Started
1
Pass the narrow end of the strap through the strap lug.
2
Pass the other end of the strap through the loop and pull tight.
32
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 33 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Powering the Camera
Charging the Battery
Use the supplied battery charger (D-BC92) to charge the supplied rechargeable lithium-ion battery (D-LI92) before using it in the camera for the first time or after a long period of non-use, or when the
[Battery depleted] message appears.
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6 ft (1.8 m)”
Charging indicator
While charging: Lights
Charging finished: Turns off
1
3 2
To power outlet
Battery
1
AC plug cord
Battery charger
1
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.
2
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
3
Place the battery in the battery charger so that the PENTAX logo is facing up.
The charging indicator turns on while charging.
When charging is finished, the charging indicator turns off.
4
Remove the battery from the battery charger when charging is finished.
33
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 34 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
• Do not charge batteries other than the rechargeable lithium ion D-LI92 battery using the supplied D-BC92 battery charger. Doing otherwise may cause damage or overheating.
• The battery has reached the end of its service life when it starts to run down soon after being charged. Replace it with a new battery.
• If the battery is inserted correctly but the charging indicator fails to light, the battery may be faulty. Replace it with a new battery.
The time required to fully charge the battery is about 120 minutes (max.).
(The charging time may vary depending on the ambient temperature and charging conditions.) The appropriate ambient temperature for charging the battery is 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).
Installing the Battery
Use the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI92 that is provided with the camera. Charge the battery before using it in the camera for the first time.
Battery lock lever
Battery/card cover lock lever
34
Battery
Battery/card cover
1
Open the battery/card cover.
Press the battery/card cover lock lever in the direction shown 1 , slide the cover towards 2 and open it towards 3 .
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 35 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
2
Using the side of the battery to press the battery lock lever in the direction of 4 , insert the battery with the PENTAX logo pointing toward the lens.
Push the battery in until it is locked in place.
1
Make sure that the battery is inserted with the PENTAX logo pointing toward the lens. If the battery is incorrectly oriented, malfunction may result.
3
Close the battery/card cover.
While lightly pressing the battery/card cover in the opposite direction indicated by 2 , slide the cover. The cover clicks to confirm that it is securely closed.
Removing the Battery
1
Open the battery/card cover.
2
Press the battery lock lever towards 4 .
The battery will be ejected. Take care not to drop the battery when removing it.
35
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 36 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
• Do not use excessive force when sliding the battery/card cover open and closed because the waterproof packing may peel off. If the packing is not in the correct position, the camera will not be waterproof.
• If the battery/card cover is not locked securely when you close it, water, sand, or dirt may get into the camera.
• This camera uses a rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI92.
Use of any other type of battery may damage the camera and cause malfunction.
• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is incorrectly oriented, malfunction may result.
• Do not remove the battery while the camera is turned on.
• When storing the battery for more than 6 months, charge the battery for 30 minutes using the battery charger and store the battery separately.
Be sure to recharge the battery every 6 to 12 months. Storing the battery below room temperature is ideal. Avoid storing it in high temperatures.
• The date and time may be returned to the default setting if the camera is left without the battery for a long time.
• Be careful as the camera or the battery may become hot when the camera is used continuously for a long period of time.
• Allow the camera to dry completely before changing the battery.
Avoid changing the battery where the camera is likely to get wet or dirty, and make sure that your hands are dry.
• Battery performance may deteriorate as temperature decreases.
When using the camera in cold regions, we recommend carrying a spare battery in your pocket to keep it warm. Battery performance will return to normal in normal temperatures.
36
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 37 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• Image Storage Capacity, Movie Recording Time, Sound Recording
Time, and Playback Time
(at 23°C or 73.4°F with the display on and the battery fully charged)
Image Storage Capacity
*1
(flash used for 50% of shots)
Approx. 260 pictures
Movie Recording
Time *2
Sound Recording
Time *2
Playback Time *2
Approx. 120 min. Approx. 350 min. Approx. 280 min.
*1 Recording capacity shows approximate number of shots recorded during CIPA-compliant testing (with display on, flash used for 50% of the shots, and 23°C or 73.4°F). Actual performance may vary according to operating conditions.
*2 According to the results of in-house testing.
• In general, battery performance may temporarily deteriorate as the temperature decreases.
• Be sure to take a spare battery with you when traveling abroad or to a cold region, or if you intend to take a lot of pictures.
1
• Battery Level Indicator
You can check the battery level by the indicator on the display.
Screen Display
(green)
(green)
(yellow)
(red)
[Battery depleted]
Battery Status
Adequate power remains.
Battery is running low.
Battery is running very low.
Battery is exhausted.
The camera will turn off after this message appears.
37
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 38 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
Using the AC Adapter
Use of the optional AC adapter kit (K-AC117) is recommended if you intend to use the camera for a long time or connect it to a computer.
1
6
5
DC terminal
4
3
DC coupler
38
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off and open the battery/card cover.
2
Remove the Battery.
Refer to p.34 - p.35 on how to open the battery/card cover and remove
the battery.
3
Insert the DC coupler.
Using the side of the DC coupler to press the battery lock lever, insert the DC coupler. Confirm that the DC coupler is locked in place.
The battery/card cover will not close while the DC coupler is inserted.
Leave the cover open when using the AC adapter and do not attempt to close it.
4
Connect the DC terminal of the AC adapter to the DC terminal of the DC coupler.
5
Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.
6
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 39 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• Make sure that the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the AC adapter.
• Make sure that the AC plug cord and the DC terminal connecting the
AC adapter to the camera are inserted securely. Data may be lost if either becomes disconnected while data is being recorded on the SD
Memory Card or the built-in memory.
• Use the AC adapter with due care to avoid fire or electric shock.
Be sure to read “About the Battery Charger and the AC Adapter” (p.3)
before using the AC adapter.
• Be sure to read the operation manual accompanying the AC adapter kit K-AC117 before using the adapter.
• When connecting the AC adapter, you cannot set the camera upright on the table because the cord from the DC coupler comes out of the bottom of the camera.
• Do not use excessive force when sliding the battery/card cover open and closed because the waterproof packing may peel off. If the packing is not in the correct position, the camera will not be waterproof.
1
39
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 40 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Installing the SD Memory Card
1
This camera uses SD Memory Cards, SDHC Memory Cards or SDXC
Memory Cards. (These cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards hereafter.) Captured images and sound files are saved on the SD
Memory Card if a card is inserted in the camera. They are saved
in the built-in memory if a card is not inserted (p.43).
• Be sure to use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory
Card that is unused or has been used on other cameras or digital
devices. Refer to “ Formatting the Memory ” (p.214) for instructions
on formatting.
• Make sure that the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD Memory Card.
• Allow the camera to dry completely before changing the SD Memory
Card. Avoid changing the card where the camera is likely to get wet or dirty, and make sure that your hands are dry.
• Do not use excessive force when sliding the battery/card cover open and closed because the waterproof packing may peel off. If the packing is not in the correct position, the camera will not be waterproof.
• The still picture storage capacity varies depending on the capacity of the SD Memory Card and the selected number of recorded pixels
• The power lamp blinks while the SD Memory Card is being accessed
(data is being recorded or read).
Backing Up Data
The camera may not be able to access data in the built-in memory in the case of a malfunction. Use a computer or other device to back up important data in another location.
40
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 41 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
SD Memory Card socket
Battery/card cover
SD Memory Card
1
Open the battery/card cover.
Press the battery/card cover lock lever in the direction shown 1 , slide the cover towards 2 and open it towards 3 .
2
Insert the SD Memory Card into the SD Memory Card socket so that the label is facing toward the front of the camera (the side with the lens).
Push the card in all the way. Images and sound may not be recorded correctly if the card is not inserted all the way.
3
Close the battery/card cover.
While lightly pressing the battery/card cover in the opposite direction indicated by 2 , slide the cover. The cover clicks to confirm that it is securely closed.
To Remove the SD Memory Card
1
Open the battery/card cover.
2
Push the card into the SD Memory Card socket to eject it.
Pull the card out.
If the battery/card cover is not locked securely when you close it, water, sand, or dirt may get into the camera.
41
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 42 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
Number of Images Recordable on an SD Memory
Card
The size of a recorded image differs depending on the number of recorded pixels of the images. This affects the number of images that can be saved on an SD Memory Card.
Choose the appropriate number of recorded pixels for still pictures on the [ A Rec. Mode] menu.
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels
1
Choose the appropriate number of recorded pixels and frame rate in [Movie] on the [ A Rec. Mode] menu.
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels and Frame Rate for Movies
1
For an approximate guide to the number of images or the length of recorded movies that can be saved on an SD Memory Card,
see “Main Specifications” (p.279).
42
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 43 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Turning the Camera On and Off
Power switch/Power lamp
1
1
Press the power switch.
The camera turns on and both the power lamp and display turn on.
If the [Language/ ] screen or [Date Adjustment] screen appears
when you turn the camera on, follow the procedure on p.45 to set
the display language and/or current date and time.
2
Press the power switch again.
The camera turns off and both the power lamp and display turn off.
1
Checking the SD Memory Card
The SD Memory Card is checked when the camera turns on and the memory status is displayed.
a
+ r
The SD Memory Card is inserted. Images and sound files will be saved on the SD
Memory Card.
The SD Memory Card is not inserted.
Images and sound files will be saved in the built-in memory.
The write-protect switch on the SD Memory
Card is in the LOCK position (p.7).
Images and sounds cannot be recorded.
38
Memory status
43
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 44 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
Starting-up in the Playback Mode
Use this function when you want to play back images or sound files straightaway without taking any pictures.
Power switch
Q
button
1
Press the power switch while holding down the Q button.
The display turns on and the camera starts up in playback mode.
To switch from Playback Mode to A mode, press the Q button or press the shutter release button halfway.
1
44
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 45 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Initial Settings
The [Language/ ] screen appears when the camera is turned on for
the first time. Perform the operations in “Setting the Display Language”
below to set the language, and in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.49)
to set the current date and time.
The language, date, and time can be changed later. Refer to the pages below for instructions.
•
To change the language, follow the steps in “Changing the Display Language”
(
•
To change the date and time, follow the steps in “Changing the Date and
1
Setting the Display Language
1
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to choose the display language.
MENU Cancel
3 button
Four-way controller
4 button
OK OK
45
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 46 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
2
Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the selected language. If the desired settings for [Hometown] and [DST]
(Daylight Saving Time) appear, proceed to Step 3.
Proceed to “ To Set Hometown and
DST ” (p.48) if the desired settings
do not appear.
3
Press the four-way controller
( 3 ) twice to select [Settings complete].
Initial Setting
English
Hometown
New York
Settings complete
DST
MENU Cancel
Daylight saving time
Initial Setting
English
Hometown
New York
Settings complete
DST
MENU Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears. Set the date and time by following the procedure in
“ Setting the Date and Time ” (p.49)
.
OK OK
46
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 47 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
If you accidentally select the wrong language and go to the next procedure, perform the following operation to set the language back.
When the Wrong Language Has Been Inadvertently Selected
1
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select the language and press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the selected language.
When the Screen After Step 2 Appears in the Wrong Language
1
Press the 3 button.
This exits the settings screen and returns the camera to capture mode.
2
Press the 3 button.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
4
Use the four-way controller ( 32 ) to select [Language/ ].
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Language/ ] screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select the language.
7
Press the 4 button.
The [ W Setting] menu appears in the selected language.
The language is now switched to your desired language. To reset [Hometown],
[Date] and [Time], refer to the pages below for instructions.
•
To change [Hometown], follow the steps in “Setting the World Time”
(
•
To change the date and time, follow the steps in “Changing the Date and
1
47
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 48 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
To Set Hometown and DST
3
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [ W Hometown].
4
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [ W Hometown] screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to choose a city.
Initial Setting
English
Hometown
New York
Settings complete
DST
MENU Cancel
Hometown
City
DST
MENU Cancel
New York
6
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [DST] (Daylight Saving Time).
7
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O or P .
8
Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen reappears.
9
Press the four-way controller
( 3 ) to select [Settings complete].
Initial Setting
English
Hometown
New York DST
Settings complete
OK OK
MENU Cancel OK OK
10
Press the 4 button.
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears. Next, set the date and time.
48
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 49 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
The video output format (NTSC/PAL) is set to the format of the city selected in
[Hometown] on the [Initial Setting] screen. See the following pages for information on the available video output formats and how to change the initial settings.
•
Video output formats available initially: “List of World Time Cities” (
1
•
To change the video out format, follow the steps in “Changing the Video
1
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time and the display format.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].
2
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to choose the date and time display format.
Choose from [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2013
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to [24h].
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [24h] (24-hour display) or [12h] (12-hour display).
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2013
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame returns to [Date Format].
49
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 50 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
6
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Date].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2013
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
7
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to the month.
8
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to change the month.
Change the day and year in the same manner.
Next, change the time.
If you selected [12h] in step 4, the setting switches between am and pm corresponding to the time.
9
Press the four-way controller
( 3 ) to select [Settings complete].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2013
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2013
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel OK OK
10
Press the 4 button.
This confirms the date and time.
If you press the 4 button in step 10, the camera clock is reset to 00 seconds. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 00 seconds.
When the [Initial Setting] or [Date Adjustment] screen is displayed, you can cancel the setting operation and switch to the capture mode by pressing the 3 button. In this case, the [Initial Setting] screen will appear next time you turn the camera on.
50
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 51 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
[Language/ ], [Date], [Time], [Hometown] and [DST] can be changed.
Refer to the pages below for instructions.
•
To change the language, follow the steps in “Changing the Display Language”
(
•
To change the date and time, follow the steps in “Changing the Date and
•
To change the city or turn DST on and off, follow the steps in “Setting the
1
51
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 52 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Understanding the Button Functions
A
Mode
2
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
5
9
1 Power switch
Turns the camera on and off (p.43).
2 Shutter release button
Focuses the camera on the subject when pressed halfway in Still
Picture Capture Mode (except when the focus mode is set to 3 , s , and \
Takes a still picture when pressed down fully (p.66).
Pressing down fully starts and stops movie recording in C (Movie) and
(Underwater Movie) modes (p.139, p.142).
Pressing down fully starts and stops sound file recording in O (Voice
3 w / x button
Changes the captured area (p.79).
4 Q button
Switches to the Q
5 3 button
Displays the [ A
52
2Common Operations
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 53 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
6 I button
Switches the Face Detection function (p.71).
The Face Detection function is switched as follows each time the I button is pressed:
Smile Capture ´ Self-portrait Assist ´ Self-portrait Assist + Smile
Capture ´ Face Detection Off ´ Face Detection On
Selects or registers a pet in e
(Pet) mode.
7 Four-way controller
( 2 )
: Changes the drive mode (p.94 - p.101).
( 3 )
: Displays the Capture Mode Palette (p.70).
( 4 )
: Changes the flash mode (p.108).
( 5 )
: Changes the focus mode (p.110).
( 23 ) : Adjusts the focus when the focus mode is set to \
8 4 / W button
Changes the information on the display (p.23).
9 Green button
Switches to the 9
Calls up the assigned function (p.130).
2
53
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 54 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Q
Mode
1
2
2
3
4
6
7
8
5 9
1 Power switch
Turns the camera on and off (p.43).
2 Shutter release button
Switches to A
3 f / y button
In single-image display, pressing f switches to 6 image display.
Pressing f again switches to 12 -
Press y to return to the previous display.
In single-image display, pressing y enlarges the image.
Press f
to return to the previous display (p.162).
In 12 image display press f to change to folder or calendar display
In folder/calendar display, press y to change to 12 image display
Adjusts the volume during playback of movies, sound files or voice
4 Q button
Switches to A
5 3 button
Displays the [ W
Setting] menu during single-image display (p.57).
Returns to single-image display during Playback Mode Palette display
54
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 55 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Returns zoom, 6- or 12 image display to single-image display.
Changes to 12-image display of the selected folder during folder
Changes to 12-image display of the selected date during calendar
6 I
button
Zooms up on the subjects’ faces in the order in which they were
recognized during shooting (Face close-up playback) (p.163).
7 Four-way controller
(
(
( 2
3 )
)
45 )
: Plays back and pauses a movie or sound file
: Displays the Playback Mode Palette (p.157).
Stops a movie or sound file during playback
: Displays the previous or next image and sound file
during single-image display (p.151).
Fast-forwards, fast-reverses, frame forwards, frame reverses, reverses a movie and makes a movie play
forwards during playback (p.152).
Fast forwards, reverses, and moves to the next index
in sound file playback (p.210).
( 2345
) : Moves the display area during zoom display (p.162).
Selects an image in 6- or 12 image display, a folder in folder display, and a date in calendar display
Moves the image when using the Frame Composite
Adjusts the position of a frame or an image when you are
using the Original Frame function (p.197).
8 4 / W button
Changes the information on the display (p.28).
Returns zoom, 6- or 12 image display to single-image display
Changes to 12 image display of the selected folder during folder
Changes to single-image display of the selected date during calendar
2
55
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 56 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
2
9 Green/ i button
Switches from single-image display to the Delete screen (p.165).
Switches from 6- or 12 image display to the Select & Delete screen
Switches from folder display to the calendar display screen (p.154).
Switches from calendar display to the folder display screen (p.154).
Switching Between
A
Mode and
Q
Mode
In this manual, the capture mode, such as for taking still pictures, is referred to as “ A mode” (the capture mode). The playback mode, such as for displaying captured images on the monitor, is referred to as “ Q mode” (the playback mode). In Q mode, you can perform simple editing operations on the images that are played back.
Follow the procedure below to switch between A mode and Q mode.
To Switch from A Mode to Q Mode
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Q mode.
To Switch from Q Mode to A Mode
1
Press the Q button or the shutter release button halfway.
The camera switches to A mode.
Displaying data stored in the built-in memory
When an SD Memory Card is inserted in the camera, images, movies, and sounds on the SD Memory Card are displayed. If you want to display images, movies, and sounds stored in built-in memory, turn the camera off and remove the SD Memory Card.
Make sure that the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD Memory Card.
56
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 57 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the Camera Functions
To change the camera settings, press the 3 button to display the
[ A Rec. Mode] menu or [ W Setting] menu. Functions for playing back and editing images and sound files are displayed from the Playback
Mode Palette.
Operating the Menus
Press the 3 button in A mode to display the [ A Rec. Mode] menu.
Press the 3 button in Q mode to display the [ W Setting] menu.
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to switch between [ A Rec. Mode] menu and [ W Setting] menu.
2
57
2
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 58 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
During playback
P
During recording
3 8
MENU
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
MENU Exit
1 / 4
Bright
14 M
AWB
Edit
MENU
Setting
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
1 / 4
02/02/2013
Standard
English
MENU Exit
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
MENU Exit
1 / 4
Bright
14 M
AWB
SHUTTER
Press halfway
P
MENU
Setting
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
1 / 4
02/02/2013
Standard
English
MENU Exit
Q
3 8
The setting is complete and the camera returns to A mode.
Edit
The setting is complete and the camera returns to Q mode.
Available button operations appear on the display during menu operation.
58
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 59 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM e.g.: To set the [Quality Level] on the [ A Rec. Mode] menu
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Image Tone].
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
1/4
Bright
14
M
MENU Exit
3
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) twice.
The frame moves to [Quality Level].
4
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears with the items that can be selected.
The pull-down menu displays only those items that can be selected with the current camera settings.
Recordable Image No.
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
MENU Cancel
Bright
14
M
ڎڎڎ
ڎڎ
ڎ
OK
12
OK
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to change the setting.
The quality level changes each time the four-way controller ( 23 ) is pressed.
6
Press the 4 button or the four-way controller ( 4 ).
The setting is saved and then the camera is ready for setting other functions.
To exit the settings, press the 3 button.
To use another operation, refer to the alternate step 6 options on the next page.
2
59
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 60 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
2
To Save the Setting and Start Taking Pictures
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the shutter release button is pressed fully, the picture is taken.
When the [ W Setting] menu is displayed from
Q
mode, you can switch to A mode by pressing the Q button.
To Save the Setting and Start Playback of Images
6
Press the Q button.
When the [ A Rec. Mode] menu is displayed from A mode, the setting is saved and the camera returns to playback status.
To Cancel the Changes and Continue with Menu Operations
6
Press the 3 button.
The changes are canceled and the screen returns to step 3.
The 3 button function differs depending on the screen. Refer to the guide indications.
MEN
U
Exit Exits the menu and returns to the original screen.
MEN
U
Returns to the previous screen with the current setting.
MEN
U
Cancel Cancels the current selection, exits the menu and returns to the previous screen.
60
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 61 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Menu List
This displays the items that can be set with the menus and provides descriptions of each item. See the list of default settings in the Appendix
“Default Settings” (p.273) to decide whether you want the settings saved
when the camera is turned off and whether you want the settings returned to the defaults when the camera is reset.
[ A Rec. Mode] Menu
This menu shows the functions related to taking still pictures and recording movies.
Item
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Description Page
For setting the tone of images
For choosing the number of recorded pixels of still pictures p.116
For setting the quality level of still pictures
White Balance
AF
Setting
Focus
Assist
For adjusting the color balance according to the lighting conditions
When
=
(Standard), q
(Macro), or (1cm Macro) is selected as the focus mode, you can change the
Focusing
Area
autofocus area (Focusing Area)
Auto Macro For choosing whether or not to use the auto macro function p.113
For setting whether or not to use the focus assist light p.114
AE Metering
Sensitivity
AUTO ISO Range
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range
Setting
Recorded
Pixels
Movie SR
Interval
Shoot
Highlight
Correction
Shadow
Correction
Pixel Track SR
Interval Shoot
For choosing the area of the screen that is metered to determine the exposure
For setting the sensitivity
For setting the adjustment range when sensitivity is set to AUTO
For adjusting the overall brightness of the picture
For choosing the number of recorded pixels and the frame rate for movies
For choosing whether or not to use the movie shake reduction function
For recording multiple still pictures taken at a set interval as a movie file
For setting whether to perform bright portion compensation
For setting whether to perform dark portion compensation
For choosing whether to compensate for camera shake while taking still pictures
For setting the interval, number of pictures, and start time for taking pictures
2
61
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 62 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
2
Sharpness
Saturation
(Tone Adjustment)
Contrast
Item
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer*
Macro Light
Description
For choosing whether to use the Blink Detection function with the Face Detection function
For choosing whether or not to use the digital zoom function
For choosing whether to display Instant Review
For choosing whether to save the set values of the shooting function or return to the defaults when the camera is turned off
For assigning a function to the Green button in A mode
For choosing sharp or soft outlines
For setting the color saturation. When [Monochrome] is selected, the item changes to [Tone Adjustment]
For setting the image contrast level
For choosing whether to imprint the date and/or time when taking still pictures
For setting whether to perform the IQ enhancer
For setting whether or not to turn on the macro light for macro photography
*IQ Enhancer = Image Quality Enhancer
Page
[ A Rec. Mode] Menu 2 [ A Rec. Mode] Menu 1
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
MENU Exit
1/4
Bright
14 M
ڎڎ
Rec. Mode
Sensitivity
AUTO ISO Range
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
MENU Exit
2/4
AUTO
ISO80-800
0.0
[ A Rec. Mode] Menu 3
3/4 Rec. Mode
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
MENU Exit
[ A Rec. Mode] Menu 4
Rec. Mode
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light
MENU Exit
4/4
Off
• Use the
9
(Green) mode to enjoy easy picture-taking using standard settings, regardless of the settings in the [ A
• Assigning frequently used functions to the Green button enables you
to go straight to the desired function (p.130).
62
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 63 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
[ W Setting] Menu
Sound
Item
Language/
Folder Name
Description
For adjusting the operation volume and playback volume, and setting the start-up sound, shutter sound, key operation sound, and self-timer sound
Date Adjustment For adjusting the date and time
Alarm For setting the alarm
World Time
Text Size
For setting the hometown and destination
For setting the text size of the menu
For setting the language in which menus and messages appear
For choosing how names are assigned to folders for storing images and sound files
Video Out For setting the output format to the AV equipment
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
For setting the HDMI output format when connecting to an AV device with an HDMI terminal
For setting whether or not to use Eye-Fi communication
Brightness Level For changing the brightness of the display
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
For setting the time until the camera enters powersaving mode
For setting the time until the camera turns off automatically
For choosing whether to use the Quick Zoom function
(p.162) when playing back images
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
Pixel Mapping
Format
For setting whether to display explanations for selected items in Capture Mode Palette and Playback
Mode Palette displays
For returning settings other than the date and time, language, world time and video out to their defaults
For deleting all the images and sound files at once
For correcting for defective pixels on the CCD sensor
For formatting the SD Memory Card/built-in memory
Page
2
63
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 64 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
2
[ W Setting] Menu 1
1/4 Setting
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
01/01/2013
Standard
English
MENU Exit
[ W Setting] Menu 3
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
MENU Exit
3/4
5sec.
3min.
[ W Setting] Menu 2
Setting
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
MENU Exit
Date
MSC
NTSC
Auto
2/4
[ W Setting] Menu 4
Setting
Pixel Mapping
Format
4 / 4
MENU Exit
64
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 65 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3Taking Pictures
Taking Still Pictures
Taking Pictures
This camera is equipped with functions and shooting modes that support a wide array of scenes and subjects. This section explains shooting using the default settings when shipped.
Power switch
Shutter release button w
/ x
button
3
1
Press the power switch.
The camera turns on and is ready to take still pictures. In this manual, this is called Still Picture Capture mode.
2
Confirm the subject and shooting information on the display.
The focus frame in the middle of the display indicates the zone of automatic focusing.
38
Focus frame
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection frame
38
Face detection frame
65
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 66 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
You can change the captured area by pressing the zoom button (p.79).
Right ( x ) Enlarges the subject.
Left ( w ) Widens the area that is captured by the camera.
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The camera emits Focus Assist light in dark shooting situations.
The focus frame (or face detection frame) on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
1/250
F4.6
38
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
The flash discharges automatically depending on the light conditions.
The image appears on the display temporarily (Instant Review: p.68)
and is saved to the SD Memory Card or the built-in memory.
Press the Green button to switch to the 9 (Green) mode and let
the camera set all the shooting functions automatically (p.77).
66
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 67 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Using the Shutter Release Button
The shutter release button works in a two-step action as follows.
Press halfway
This refers to pressing the shutter release button gently to the first position. This locks the focus setting and the exposure. The green focus frame lights on the display when the shutter release button is pressed halfway and the subject is in focus. If the subject is out of focus, the frame turns white.
Press fully
This refers to pressing the shutter release button all the way down to the fully depressed position. This takes a picture.
3
Not pressed Pressed halfway
(first position)
Pressed fully
(second position)
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent camera shake.
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn where the first position and second position are.
Poor focusing conditions
The camera may not be able to focus under the following conditions. In these cases, lock the focus on an object the same distance away as the subject
(by pressing and holding the shutter release button halfway), then aim the camera at your subject and press the shutter release button fully.
• Objects that lack contrast such as a blue sky or white wall
• Dark places or objects, or conditions that prevent light being reflected back
• Intricate patterns
• Fast moving objects
• When there is an object in the foreground and an object in the background in the captured area
• Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (bright background)
67
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 68 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Instant Review and Blink Detection
The image appears on the display temporarily (Instant Review) immediately after it is captured. If the camera detects that the subject’s
eyes are closed while Face Detection (p.71) is activated, the message
[Closed eyes have been detected] appears for 3 seconds (Blink Detection).
• When the Face Detection function does not work, Blink Detection also does not function. Even if the subject’s faces are recognized,
Blink Detection may not function depending on the condition of the recognized faces.
•
You can also disable the Blink Detection function (p.129).
68
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 69 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the Shooting Mode
This camera has a variety of shooting modes that let you take pictures or record movies and sound in different situations simply by choosing the right mode for the particular situation from the Capture Mode Palette.
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to choose a shooting mode.
A guide of the selected shooting mode is displayed in the lower part of the display.
3
Press the 4 button.
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
MENU Cancel
Landscape
For capturing landscape views. Enhances colors of sky and foliage
1/2
OK OK
3
38
69
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 70 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
The following 24 modes can be selected with Capture Mode Palette.
b
R
A
C
Item
Auto Picture
Program
Night Scene
Movie
Description
Automatically selects the best capture mode
Used for basic shooting. Various functions can also be set with this mode
For night time images. Use of a tripod or other support is suggested
For recording movies
Underwater For capturing images underwater
Underwater Movie Use this mode for taking underwater movie
Page
a b c
Landscape
X Digital Wide c
Q
R e
\
S
B
K
Flower
Portrait
Digital SR
Surf & Snow
Kids
Pet
Sport
Fireworks
U Candlelight
B
Night Scene
Portrait
Text
Food
For capturing landscape views. Enhances colors of sky and foliage
For images of flowers. The outline of the flower is softened
For capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy and bright skin tone
Stitches two pictures together to create a wider image
Higher sensitivity reduces blur
For bright images such as sand or snow.
Accurately meters for bright scenes
For capturing moving kids. Reproduces a healthy and bright skin tone
Suitable shooting for moving pets. Available to detect registered pets
For a fast moving subject. Tracks the subject until the picture is taken
For capturing fireworks. Use of a tripod or other support is suggested
For capturing scenes in candlelight
For images of people at night. Use of a tripod or other support is advised
Captures text in an easy to read manner.
Text contrast can be adjusted
For images of food and prepared dishes.
Enhances saturation and contrast
F Digital Panorama Stitches images taken with the camera to create
⎯
⎯
⎯
70
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 71 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Item Description Page
N Frame Composite For capturing images with a frame. Recorded
Report
For capturing image with fixed 1280×960 pixels for reports
* Green Mode (p.77) and Voice Recording (p.208) are available in addition
to the ones noted above.
⎯
• In shooting modes other than R (Program), A (Night Scene),
C
(Movie), (Digital Microscope), c (Digital SR),
F
(Digital
Panorama),
X
(Digital Wide), and
N
(Frame Composite), saturation, contrast, sharpness, white balance, etc. are automatically set to the optimal settings for the selected mode.
• Some functions may not be available or may not function fully depending on the selected shooting mode. For details, refer
to “Functions Available for Each Shooting Mode” (p.266).
• You can turn off the shooting mode guide on the Capture Mode Palette
Using the Face Detection Function
When the camera detects a person’s face in the image, the Face Detection function displays a yellow face detection frame around the face on the display screen, sets the focus (Face Detection AF) and compensates the exposure
(Face Detection AE).
If the subject in the face detection frame moves, the frame also moves and changes size as it tracks the face.
The Face Detection function can recognize up to 32 people’s faces.
If it recognizes multiple faces, the camera displays a yellow frame over the main face and white frames over the other faces.
It can display up to a total of 31 frames, including both the main and white frames.
38
Face detection frame
When the multiple faces are detected
38
Main frame White frame
3
71
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 72 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• Face Detection AF and AE may not work if the subject is wearing sunglasses, has part of their face covered or is not looking toward the camera.
• If the camera cannot detect the subject’s face, the camera focuses using the setting currently selected in [Focusing Area].
• However, the Smile Capture function may not work and an image may not be captured, even when turned on, depending on the condition of the recognized faces, such as the faces are too small. If this happens, press the shutter release button to take a picture.
• In e (Pet) mode, the Face Detection mode is switched to pet detection (only one pet).
3
To Switch the Face Detection Function
By default, the Face Detection function is set to Face Detection On.
You can switch to the Smile Capture function, which automatically releases the shutter when your subject smiles. The Face Detection function is switched as follows each time the I button is pressed:
Smile Capture ´ Self-portrait Assist ´ Self-portrait Assist + Smile
Capture ´ Face Detection Off ´ Face Detection On
I
button
An icon indicating either Face Detection or Smile Capture appears on the display. (The Face Detection Off icon only appears right after the Face Detection function is switched to off.)
72
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 73 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Face Detection On
P
Smile Capture
P
Self-portrait Assist
P
P P
Face Detection Off Self-portrait Assist
+ Smile Capture
• The Face Detection function cannot be set to off in b (Auto Picture),
B (Night Scene Portrait), c
(Portrait), or R (Kids). Any one of Face
Detection On, Smile Capture, Self-portrait Assist or Self-portrait Assist
+ Smile Capture is always activated in these modes.
• When Face Detection Off is selected, selecting
9
(Green), b (Auto
Picture), B (Night Scene Portrait), C (Movie), c
(Portrait),
R
(Kids), or (Underwater Movie) modes automatically switches to Face
Detection On. When switching to another mode from one of these modes, the Face Detection setting returns to the previous setting.
• If you use the Face Detection function when the flash mode is set to , (Auto), the flash mode automatically changes to d (Flash On +
Red-eye).
• The Self-portrait Assist or the Self-portrait Assist + Smile Capture cannot be set to on in
X
(Digital Wide), F (Digital Panorama),
(Report), e
(Pet),
C
(Movie), (Underwater Movie), or (Digital
Microscope).
• Self-portrait Assist and Self-portrait Assist + Smile Capture cannot be selected when (Report) mode is selected or the Macro Light is on in the [ A Rec. Mode] menu.
3
73
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 74 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
To Use the Self-portrait Assist Function
The macro lights around the lens blink when the camera detects people faces in the Self-portrait Assist or Self-portrait Assist + Smile Capture function. The position of the blinking light indicates where the detected face is on the screen.
When the camera detects a face When the camera detects two faces
Detects a face on the right while facing the camera.
Detects two faces, one at the center and one on the right while facing the camera.
Detects a face on the left while facing the camera.
Detects two faces, one at the center and one on the left while facing the camera.
Detects a face at the center while facing the camera.
Detects two faces at the center or one on the right and one on the left while facing the camera.
• The camera can tell the position of up to two detected faces.
• When the camera detects three or four faces, the lights blink depending on the number of the detected faces. When the camera detects five or more faces, all lights (five) blink (the lights do not tell the position of detected faces).
• In b (Auto Picture) mode, LED turns off after pressing the shutter release button halfway when the camera is in a mode with no face detection function.
• When the Self Portrait Assist function is on, LED does not turn off after the set period of Power Saving.
• LED does not blink when the detected faces are too small.
74
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 75 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Taking Pictures Automatically (Auto Picture Mode)
In b (Auto Picture) mode, the camera automatically selects the most appropriate mode depending on the situations and subjects.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select b (Auto Picture).
3
Press the 4 button.
Auto Picture mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection frame
appears (p.71). When the camera
38 detects a pet’s full face, the shutter is automatically released.
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The automatically selected capture mode appears on the top left of the display.
Standard
Landscape
Sport
Portrait×Blue Sky
Night Scene
Flower
Candlelight
Portrait×Backlight
Night Scene Portrait
Portrait
Blue Sky
Sunset
Portrait×Sunset Group Photograph Text
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
3
75
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 76 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
The following restrictions apply in b mode:
• EV Compensation is unavailable.
• You cannot turn the Face Detection function off.
• The [Focusing Area] setting is fixed at
J
(Multiple).
• Flower cannot be selected when using Digital Zoom or Intelligent
Zoom.
• If Night Scene is selected when the flash mode is , (Auto) or c
(Auto
+ Red-eye), the flash mode automatically changes to a (Flash Off).
• If the (Night Scene Portrait) mode is selected when the flash mode is , (Auto), the flash mode automatically changes to d
(Flash On +
Red-eye) when the camera detects a face and determines that the flash is needed.
Setting the Functions (Program Mode)
In R (Program) mode, the shutter speed and the aperture are set automatically by the camera during shooting. However, you can select other functions such as the flash mode and recorded pixels.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select
R (Program).
76
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 77 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Press the 4 button.
P
Program mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection
4
Set the functions you want to use.
Refer to “Setting the Shooting Functions” (p.108 - p.138) for details
of how to set the functions.
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
1
3
Taking Pictures in the Basic Mode (Green Mode)
In the 9 (Green) mode, you can enjoy easy picture-taking using standard settings, regardless of the settings in the [ A Rec. Mode] menu.
9 mode settings are as shown below.
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
, (Auto)
9
(Standard)
Focus Mode = (Standard)
Information Display Standard
Pixel Track SR
Recorded Pixels
White Balance
P (Off) g
(4288×3216)
F
(Auto)
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
Sensitivity
EV Compensation ±0.0
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
P
P
(Off)
(Off)
AUTO (80-800)
O
O
O
(On)
(On)
(On)
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
AE Metering
Image Tone
Quality Level
J
(Multiple)
O (On)
O
(On)
L (Multi-segment metering)
Bright
D
(Better)
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light
G
(Normal)
G
(Normal)
G
(Normal)
Off
O
(On)
P (Off)
77
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 78 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Shutter release button
Green Button
3
1
Press the Green button in A mode.
The camera switches to 9 mode.
Press the Green button again to return to the status before 9 mode was selected.
38
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection
2
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
• Assign
9
mode to the [Green Button] on the [
A
Rec. Mode] menu for using 9
mode (p.131). (The default setting is
9 mode).
• In 9 mode, you cannot change the information on the display by pressing the 4 / W button.
• Press the 3 button in
9
mode to display the [
W
Setting] menu.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu cannot be displayed.
• When the camera is turned off in 9 mode, it turns on in 9 mode next time the power switch is pressed.
78
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 79 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Using the Zoom
You can use the zoom to change the captured area.
w
/ x
button
3 button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the w / x button in A mode.
w Wide (left)
Widens the area that is captured by the camera.
x Tele (right)
Enlarges the subject.
Zoom ratio
Zoom bar
If you continue to press x , the camera 38 automatically switches from Optical Zoom to Intelligent Zoom and stops at the point where the zoom switches to Digital Zoom.
Once the button is released and pressed again, the camera switches to digital zoom.
If the Digital Zoom is set to off on the menu, the Optical Zoom and the
Intelligent Zoom ranges are available for use. The zoom ratio of the intelligent zoom changes depending on the number of recorded pixels.
The zoom bar is displayed as follows.
Zoom in with high image quality.
Zoom in with some degree of image deterioration.
3
Optical zoom range*1
*1 You can zoom in to a maximum of 5× optically.
*2 The Intelligent Zoom range differs depending on the recorded pixels. See the following table.
Intelligent
Zoom range*2
Digital
Zoom range
79
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 80 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Recorded pixels and the maximum zoom ratio
Recorded Pixels g
/ i
/ j
Intelligent Zoom
(The zoom ratio includes the 5× optical zoom.)
Not Available (5× optical zoom only)
Approx. 7.0×
Digital Zoom
6 / f / Approx. 8.3×
Approx. 10.5×
Equivalent to approx. 33.5× h h
V
(*)
Approx. 11.2×
Not Available (5× optical zoom only) l Approx. 20.9×
Equivalent to approx. 33.5× m Approx. 33.5× (same as Digital Zoom)
(*) V can only be set for recorded pixels when (Report) mode is set.
• We recommend you use a tripod to prevent camera shake when taking pictures at high zoom.
• Pictures taken in the digital zoom range appear grainier than pictures taken in the optical zoom range.
• Intelligent Zoom is not available under the following conditions:
When the number of recorded pixels is set to g , i and j
(5× optical zoom available).
In 9 (Green), C (Movie), and (Underwater movie) mode
• Intelligent Zoom and Digital Zoom are not available in c (Digital SR) and (Report) modes, or when the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400.
• The image enlarged using Intelligent Zoom may appear rough on the display. This does not affect the quality of the recorded image.
• Intelligent Zoom is available regardless of whether Digital Zoom is turned on or off.
• Digital Zoom is not available in (Digital Microscope) mode.
• Not every zooming function is available in
X
(Digital Wide) mode.
80
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 81 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To Set the Digital Zoom
The digital zoom is set to O (On) in the default settings. To take pictures using only the optical zoom and Intelligent Zoom, set the digital zoom to P (Off).
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Digital Zoom].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to switch between
O (On) or P (Off).
O (On)
P (Off)
Uses Digital Zoom
Uses only optical zoom and Intelligent Zoom
The setting is saved.
Rec. Mode
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
MENU Exit
3/4
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Saving the Digital Zoom Function setting
1
3
Taking Pictures of Dark Scenes (Night Scene,
Night Scene Portrait, Digital SR, Fireworks, and Candlelight Modes)
You can choose settings appropriate for taking pictures of dark scenes, such as nightscapes.
A Night Scene
For night time images. Use of a tripod or other support is suggested
B Night Scene Portrait For images of people at night. Use of a tripod or other c Digital SR
S
U
Fireworks
Candlelight
Higher sensitivity reduces blur
For capturing fireworks. Use of a tripod or other support is suggested
For capturing scenes in candlelight
81
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 82 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
3
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select
A (Night Scene), B (Night Scene Portrait), c (Digital SR),
S
(Fireworks), or
U
(Candlelight).
3
Press the 4 button.
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera recognizes a person’s face, the Face Detection
function is activated and the face detection frame appears (p.71).
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
• The shutter speed tends to be slower when taking pictures of dark scenes.
•
To prevent the camera from shaking, set the Pixel Track SR (p.126) or use
a tripod and/or remote control (optional), the self-timer function (p.94).
• In c (Digital SR) mode, the sensitivity is automatically set to AUTO, the [AUTO ISO Range] is set to 80-6400, and the number of recorded pixels is fixed at f (2592×1944)/ (2592×1464).
• For
S
(Fireworks) mode, the sensitivity is fixed at the minimum, the focus mode is s
(Infinity), and the flash mode is a
(Flash Off).
Also, the shutter speed is set to 4 seconds and the aperture is fixed to open.
• Digital Zoom and Intelligent Zoom are not available in c (Digital SR) mode.
82
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 83 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Taking Pictures of People (Portrait Mode)
c
(Portrait) mode is suitable for taking pictures of people. It reproduces
a healthy and bright skin tone. The Face Detection function (p.71)
operates for the shooting mode, making it easier to emphasize the subject’s face when taking pictures.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select c
(Portrait).
3
Press the 4 button.
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection frame
38
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
3
83
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 84 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Taking Pictures of Children (Kids Mode)
R
(Kids) mode is suitable for taking pictures of moving children. It also
reproduces healthy and bright skin tone. Face Detection function (p.71)
operates automatically in R mode, making it easier to emphasize the subject’s face when taking pictures.
Shutter release button
3
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select
R
(Kids).
3
Press the 4 button.
Kids mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection
38
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
84
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 85 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Taking Pictures of Your Pet (Pet Mode)
In e
(Pet) mode, the camera automatically releases the shutter when the pet is detected. Also the camera can register pets.
Shutter release button
3 button
I
button
Four-way controller
4 button
Green button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select e
(Pet).
3
Press the 4 button.
e (Pet) mode is selected and the camera returns to capture status.
When the camera detects the pet’s full face, the shutter is automatically released.
38
To Register the Pet
1
Press the
I
button on the capture status screen in e
(Pet) mode.
The pet registration screen appears.
Selecting pet to shoot
New Registry
MENU Cancel OK OK
3
85
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 86 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
2
Press the
I
button again.
The pet registration screen appears.
Aiming the camera at the pet’s full face automatically releases the shutter and the pet registration confirmation dialog appears.
If pet face turns to camera front, it's self-registering
Pet registration screen
When you select [Registry] using fourway controller ( 2 ) and press the 4 button, the picture of the registered pet is indicated on the upper-left corner of the display and the camera returns to the capture status.
Registry
Cancel
Registry confirmation screen
When the camera detects the pet’s full face, the camera automatically releases the shutter.
You can also take a picture by pressing the shutter release button.
When you press the I button twice in the capture status screen, the pet
38
Capture status screen registration screen appears to register another pet. You can register up to three pets.
• When you press the 3 button on the pet registration screen, the registration will be canceled and the camera returns to the still picture capture mode.
• Only dogs and cats can be registered using the Pet Detection function.
Other animals or human faces cannot be registered. You may not be able to register a pet’s face if, for example, the pet’s face is too small.
• The camera may not detect the registered pet’s face, depending on the shooting situation.
• You cannot turn off the LCD by pressing the 4 / W button in e
(Pet) mode.
• Digital Zoom and Intelligent Zoom are unavailable when the sensitivity is set to 3200/6400 in e
(Pet) mode.
86
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 87 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To Switch the Pet You Want to Shoot
If you have registered two or three pets, choose the pet you want to detect.
1
Press the I button on the capture status screen in e (Pet) mode.
The pet registration screen appears.
Selecting pet to shoot
MENU Cancel
Delete
OK OK
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select the pet you want to detect.
3
Press the 4 button.
The selected pet is switched to the pet you want to detect and the camera returns to capture status.
To Delete the Pet from the Entry
1
Press the I button on the capture status screen in e
(Pet) mode.
The pet registration screen appears.
Selecting pet to shoot
MENU Cancel
Delete
OK OK
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select the pet you want to delete.
3
Press the Green button.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Delete].
5
Press the 4 button.
The selected pet is deleted.
• [Focusing Area] is set to
W
(Automatic Tracking AF) and the flash mode is set to a
(Flash Off). However, you can change these settings.
• [Focus Assist] is set to off. However, you can change this setting.
3
87
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 88 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Taking Pictures of Sports and Leisure Activities
(Surf & Snow/Sport Mode)
Q
\
Surf & Snow
Sport
For bright images such as sand or snow.
Accurately meters for bright scenes
For a fast moving subject. Tracks the subject until the picture is taken
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select Q (Surf &
Snow) or \ (Sport).
3
Press the 4 button.
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function
is activated and the face detection frame appears (p.71).
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
When the Sport mode is selected, 38 the focus frame follows the subject while the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
88
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 89 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
Taking Pictures of Text (Text Mode)
Take crisp and easy-to-read pictures of text. It is useful for taking pictures of and saving important documents, and when the text is too small and difficult to read.
Color
Reversed Color
B&W
Negative
A picture of the text is taken in its original color.
The colors are reversed.
A picture of the text is taken in black and white.
Black and white are reversed.
Shutter release button
3
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select (Text).
3
Press the 4 button.
The text mode selection screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select , , , or .
89
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 90 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
Press the 4 button.
The selected icon appears and the camera returns to capture status.
3
38
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
7
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
Taking Pictures in Digital Microscope Mode
In the Digital Microscope mode, you can take pictures of objects as close as 1 cm, also because the macro lights around the lens are always lighted, you can take minute pictures of text, the veins of leaves, or specimens of tiny insects etc.
• The number of recorded pixels is fixed at h
(1920×1080).
• The focus mode is fixed at (1cm Macro).
• The default setting is O (On) for Pixel Track SR.
• j (Continuous Shooting) / c (Burst Shooting)/ l (Auto Bracketing) cannot be selected.
• The flash does not discharge in this mode.
• The Face Detection function and the Blink Detection function are turned off.
• You can change the information display only between the normal and No Info displays.
• The illumination of the macro lights may be uneven or insufficient depending on the shooting conditions.
1
Press four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select
(Digital Microscope).
90
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 91 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Press the 4 button.
Digital Microscope mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
4
Press the w / x button.
If you press x , the camera enlarges the subject.
w Wide (left)
Widens the area that is captured by the camera.
x Tele (right)
Enlarges the subject.
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green at the position where the camera focuses on the subject.
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
Attaching the supplied macro stand (O-MS1) reduces camera shake
during macro photography (p.22).
3
91
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 92 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Framing Your Pictures (Frame Composite Mode)
In
N
(Frame Composite) mode, you can take pictures using the frames stored in the camera.
Shutter release button f
/ y
button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select
N
(Frame Composite).
3
Press the 4 button.
The 12-frame display of the frame selection screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to choose the frame you want to use.
5
Press the y button.
The selected frame appears in single-image display.
You can choose another frame using either of the following operations.
Four-way controller (
45
) Press to choose a different frame.
Zoom button ( f ) Press to return to the 12-frame display of the frame selection screen, and then perform step 4 to choose a different frame.
92
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 93 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
6
Press the 4 button.
The frame appears on the display.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection
38
7
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
8
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
3
• The number of recorded pixels is fixed at h (2048×1536)/ h
(1920×1080).
• You cannot turn off the LCD by pressing the 4 / W button in
N
(Frame composite) mode.
• At shipment, the camera includes 3 default frames for each aspect ratio (4:3 and 16:9). (The CD-ROM supplied with the camera contains a total of 90 frames, including the default frames.)
Optional Frames
The optional frames are stored in the CD-ROM supplied with the camera.
To use these frames, copy them from the CD-ROM. These optional frames are deleted if the files on the built-in memory are deleted with a computer or if the built-in memory is formatted.
Adding a Frame to a captured image
1
93
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 94 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Using the Self-timer
In Self-timer mode, the picture is taken ten seconds or two seconds after the shutter release button is pressed.
Stabilize the camera with a tripod or other support when taking a picture with the self-timer.
g
Z
Use this mode when you want to be included in a group picture. The picture is taken approximately ten seconds after the shutter release button is pressed.
Use this mode to avoid camera shake. The picture is taken approximately two seconds after the shutter release button is pressed.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
94
1
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) in A mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select g and press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select g or Z and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take the picture using the self-timer.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is
Drive Mode
Self-timer
activated and the face detection frame appears (p.71).
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 95 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
Countdown starts and the remaining seconds are displayed on the screen.
If you select g
The self timer lamp and all of the macro lights turn on.
From 4 seconds before shooting, the macro lights turn off in order from the top right.
From 3 seconds before shooting, the self timer lamp also blinks.
If you select Z
The self timer lamp and the macro lights blink.
The picture is taken after a countdown of either ten seconds or two seconds.
Focusing may be compromised if you move the camera while the selftimer lamp is blinking when taking still pictures.
• In C (Movie) and (Underwater Movie) modes, recording will start after ten seconds (or two seconds).
• Press the shutter release button halfway while the self-timer is engaged to stop the countdown and press fully to restart the countdown.
• Z cannot be selected while 9 (Green) mode is in default setting.
Select Z in another shooting mode and then switch the shooting mode to 9 .
• The self-timer lamp does not flash in e
(Pet) mode.
• In the following situations, the macro lights remain turned on regardless of the countdown.
In the Digital Microscope mode
When [Macro Light] on the [
A
Rec. Mode] menu is set to
O
(On)
3
Taking a Series of Pictures (Continuous Shooting/
Burst Shooting)
Pictures are taken continuously as long as the shutter release button is pressed.
j c
Continuous
Shooting
Burst
Shooting
Each time a picture is taken, the image is saved in the memory before the next image is taken. The higher the image quality, the longer the interval between shots.
The number of recorded pixels is fixed at f (2592×1944)/
(2592×1464) and the interval between shots is shorter than “Continuous Shooting”.
* The number of images that can be shot continuously and the interval between shots depend on shooting situations.
95
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 96 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
3
1
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) in A mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select j or c and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready for continuous shooting and burst shooting.
Drive Mode
Continuous Shooting
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
Pictures are taken continuously as long as you keep the shutter release button pressed.
• The flash does not discharge in j and c modes.
• j
and c cannot be selected in
9
(Green), b (Auto Picture),
(Digital Microscope), A (Night Scene), C (Movie),
(Underwater Movie),
S
(Fireworks),
N
(Frame Composite),
X
(Digital Wide) or F (Digital Panorama) modes.
• Digital Zoom and Intelligent Zoom are unavailable when the sensitivity is set to 3200 and higher.
96
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 97 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• With j , you can continue shooting until the memory capacity of the SD Memory Card or built-in memory is full.
• The interval of j
varies according to the [Recorded Pixels] and [Quality Level] settings.
• The focus, exposure and white balance are locked with the first shot.
•
When the Face Detection function is activated (p.71), it works only
when taking the first shot.
• The Blink Detection function works only for the last shot.
• The number of recorded pixels is fixed at f / in c mode.
When the shooting mode is set to (Report), the number of recorded pixels is set to V (1280×960).
3
Taking Pictures Using the Remote Control Unit
(Optional)
You can use the remote control (optional) to take pictures while you are away from the camera.
i h
3-sec Remote
Control
0-sec Remote
Control
The shutter will be released after about three seconds when the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
The shutter will be released immediately when the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) in A mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select i and press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
97
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 98 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select i or h and press the 4 button.
The self-timer lamp begins to blink slowly and the camera is ready to take a picture with the remote control.
When the camera detects a person’s
Drive Mode
Remote Control face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection
4
Point the remote control at the remote control receiver and press the shutter release button on the remote control.
The focus frame turns green when the subject is in focus and the camera takes a picture at the following timing.
When i (3-sec Remote Control) is selected:
The self-timer lamp and the macro lights blink quickly and the camera takes a picture after about three seconds.
When h (0-sec Remote Control) is selected:
The camera takes a picture immediately.
• The operating range is approx. 4 m (13 ft) from the front of the camera when using the remote control unit.
• In
C
(Movie) and (Underwater Movie) modes , pressing the shutter release button again stops the recording.
• The camera takes a picture even if the focus is not achieved.
• If the shutter release button on the camera is pressed halfway during the countdown, the countdown stops. If the shutter release button on the remote control is pressed again, the camera starts the countdown again.
• i
/ h cannot be selected in
9
(Green) mode.
• The self-timer lamp does not flash in e
(Pet) mode.
98
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 99 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Taking Pictures at a Set Interval (Interval Shoot)
In this mode, a set number of pictures can be taken automatically at a set interval from a set time.
Interval
Number of Shots
10 sec. – 99 min.
2 shots – number of recordable images
Start Delay 0 min. – 24 hours
Set the camera to take pictures at intervals.
The intervals can be set in increments of one second from ten seconds to 4 minutes, or in 1 minute increments from 4 to 99 minutes. You cannot set the camera to take interval shots at less than ten seconds.
You can set this to up to 1000 shots. However, it cannot exceed the number of recordable images.
You can set 1 minute increments for the first
59 minutes and 1 hour increments from there. If the start time is set to 0 minutes, the first picture is taken as soon as the shutter release button is pressed.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) in A mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select k (Interval Shoot) and press the 4 button.
The current interval shoot settings appear for approximately 1 minute.
To take pictures with the current settings, go to step 10.
Drive Mode
Interval Shoot
3
Press the 4 button while the settings are displayed.
The [Interval Shoot] setting screen appears. [Interval] is marked with the frame.
4
Set the interval.
1 Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
Interval Shoot
Interval 0 min.
2 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the minutes, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
Number of Shots
Start Delay 0 hr.
3 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the seconds, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame returns to [Interval].
MENU
2
5
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Number of Shots].
10 sec.
0 min.
3
99
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 100 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
6
Set the number of shots.
1 Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
2 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set [Number of Shots], then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame returns to [Number of Shots].
7
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Start Delay].
8
Set the start delay.
1 Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
2 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the hours, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
3 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the minutes, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame returns to [Start Delay].
9
Press the 3 button.
The [Interval Shoot] settings are saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
10
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green if the subject is in focus.
11
Press the shutter release button fully.
Interval shooting starts.
The LCD turns off between shots (during standby). Press the power switch during standby to display the remaining number of shots and interval on the monitor.
The [Stop interval shooting?] message is displayed when the power switch and then the 3 button are pressed during standby.
Pressing the 4 button cancels interval shooting.
• Interval Shoot is unavailable in b (Auto Picture), 9 (Green),
F
(Digital Panorama),
X
(Digital Wide),
S
(Fireworks) and O (Voice Recording) modes.
• Even if an alarm is set, the alarm will not ring during interval shooting.
• Interval Shoot stops if the SD Memory Card is removed or inserted during standby.
The Interval Shoot settings can also be configured from the [ A Rec.
100
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 101 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Taking Pictures with Automatic Exposure Adjustment
(Auto Bracketing)
Press the shutter release button once to automatically adjust the exposure and take three pictures in succession. After taking the pictures, you can select the best one.
The shooting order is best exposure → –1.0 EV → +1.0 EV.
Shutter release button
3
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) in A mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select a (Auto
Bracketing) and press the 4 button.
The camera is now ready to take pictures with Auto Bracketing.
Drive Mode
Auto Bracketing
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green if the subject is in focus.
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
Press the shutter release button once to automatically adjust the exposure and take the three pictures at different exposures.
•
When the Instant Review is set to on (p.130), the pictures taken are
shown in Instant Review after shooting (p.68).
• Auto Bracketing is unavailable in C (Movie), (Underwater Movie), b (Auto Picture), (Digital Microscope),
9
(Green),
S (Fireworks), F (Digital Panorama), X (Digital Wide),
N
(Frame Composite) and
O
(Voice Recording) modes.
101
3
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 102 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Using the Digital Wide Function (Digital Wide Mode)
In
X
(Digital Wide) mode, you can stitch two vertical images captured with this camera into a single frame up to approx. 21 mm coverage
(35 mm film equivalent).
+
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select X
(Digital Wide).
102
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 103 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera enters the X mode.
Turn the camera 90° clockwise and align your first picture.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and
the face detection frame appears ( p.71
).
1 38
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
22
The first captured image is temporarily saved, and the shooting screen for the second image is displayed.
3
OK Exit
6
Take the second image.
Overlap the image on the preview guide on the left of the screen to compose the second image. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to take the second image. This combines first and second images.
The stitched first and second image appears on the display temporarily
(Instant Review), and then is saved.
103
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 104 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
• To minimize distortion when taking the second image, turn the camera so that it pivots around the right edge of the preview guide on the screen.
• Some distortion may result from moving objects, repeating patterns, or if nothing exists when overlapping the first and second image on the preview guide.
•
When the Face Detection function is activated (p.71), it works only
when taking the first shot.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured with
X
mode is fixed at f (2592×1944).
• (1cm Macro) is unavailable in X mode.
• You cannot change the information on the display by pressing the 4 /
W button in
X
(Digital Wide) mode.
To Cancel after Taking the First Shot
1
When the shooting screen for the second image is
displayed in step 5 on p.103, press the
4 button or the four-way controller ( 3 ).
A confirmation dialog appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select an option and press the 4 button.
Save
Save the image(s) and exit this screen?
Save
Discard
Cancel Saves the first image and you can retake the first shot.
The first image is saved at h (2048×1536).
Discard
Cancel
Discards the first image and you can retake the first shot.
Returns to the shooting screen for the second image.
104
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 105 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Taking Panoramic Pictures (Digital Panorama Mode)
In F (Digital Panorama) mode, you can stitch together two or three captured frames to create a panoramic photograph with the camera.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select F
(Digital Panorama).
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera enters the F mode and the message [Set shift direction] is displayed.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to choose the direction in which the images will be joined.
The screen for taking the first frame is displayed.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection
1
38
3
105
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 106 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
The screen for taking the second frame is displayed after you take the first frame.
If you select right ( 5 ) in step 4:
The right edge of the first frame appears in semi-transparent form on the left edge of the display.
If you select left ( 4 ) in step 4:
The left edge of the first frame appears in semi-transparent form on the right edge of the display.
7
Take the second frame.
1 2
Move the camera so that the semitransparent image and the actual view overlap and press the shutter release button.
8
Take the third frame.
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to take the third frame.
The panorama images are joined and a stitched together image appears.
The stitched together image does not appear when [Instant Review]
• Some distortion may result from moving objects, repeating patterns, or if nothing exists when overlapping the first and second frames or the second and third frames on the preview guide.
•
When the Face Detection function is activated (p.71), it works only
when taking the first shot.
• You cannot turn off the LCD by pressing the 4 / W button in F (Digital Panorama) mode.
106
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 107 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To Cancel after Taking the First or Second Frame
1
After shooting the first frame in step 6 on p.106
or the second frame in step 7, press the 4 button or the four-way controller ( 3 ).
A confirmation dialog appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select an option and press the 4 button.
Save the image(s) and exit this screen?
Save
Discard
Cancel Save Saves the captured image(s) and you can retake the first frame.
When this option is selected after shooting the second frame, the first and the second frames are stitched together and saved as a panoramic photograph.
Discard Discards the captured image(s) and you can retake the first frame.
Cancel Returns to the previous shooting screen.
Unstitched images shot in
F
mode are fixed at i (1600×1200).
3
107
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 108 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the Shooting Functions
3
Selecting the Flash Mode
, a b c d
Auto
Flash Off
Flash On
Auto + Red-eye
Flash On +
Red-eye
The flash discharges automatically depending on the light conditions.
The flash does not discharge, regardless of the brightness.
Use this mode to take pictures where flash photography is prohibited.
The flash discharges regardless of the brightness.
This mode reduces the phenomenon of red eyes caused by the light from the flash being reflected in the subject’s eyes.
The flash discharges automatically.
This mode reduces the phenomenon of red eyes caused by the light from the flash being reflected in the subject’s eyes.
The flash discharges regardless of the light conditions.
• The flash mode is fixed at a in the following situations:
When C (Movie), (Underwater Movie), (Digital Microscope), or
S
(Fireworks) is selected as the capture mode.
When j (Continuous Shooting), c (Burst Shooting), or l (Auto Bracketing) is selected as the Drive Mode.
When s (Infinity) is selected as the focus mode.
• In 9 (Green) mode, you can only select , or a .
• In A (Night Scene) mode, you cannot select , and c .
• If you use the Face Detection function when , is selected, the mode is automatically set to d .
• A pre-flash discharges when using the red-eye reduction function.
Using the flash when capturing images at a close distance may cause irregularities in the image due to the light distribution.
108
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 109 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller
( 4 ) in A mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
The flash mode changes each time the button is pressed. You can also change the setting using the four-way controller ( 23 ).
Flash Mode
Auto
2
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
About the red-eye phenomenon
Taking pictures using the flash may cause the subject’s eyes to appear red in the resulting picture. This phenomenon occurs when the light from the flash is reflected in the subject’s eyes. It can be reduced by illuminating the area around the subject or moving closer to the subject and zooming out to a wider angle. Setting the flash mode to c
(Auto + Red-eye) or d
(Flash On + Red-eye) is also an effective way of reducing red eyes.
If the subject’s eyes appear red despite such precautions, they can be corrected
by the red-eye compensation function (p.191).
3
Saving the Flash Mode setting 1
109
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 110 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Selecting the Focus Mode
= q
3 s
Standard
Macro
1cm Macro
Pan Focus
Infinity
This mode is used when the distance to the subject is from 50 cm to ∞ . The camera is focused on the subject in the autofocus area when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
This mode is used when the distance to the subject is from 10 cm to 60 cm. The camera is focused on the subject in the autofocus area when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
This mode is used when the distance to the subject is from 1 cm to 30 cm. The camera is focused on the subject in the autofocus area when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
This mode is used when you ask someone to take pictures for you, or when taking pictures of the scenery through the window of a car or train. The entire picture, from the front to the back, is focused.
This mode is used for taking distant objects. The flash is set to a (Flash Off).
\
Manual Focus This mode lets you adjust the focus manually.
110
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller
( 5 ) in A mode.
The [Focus Mode] screen appears.
The focus mode changes each time the button is pressed. You can also change the setting using the four-way controller ( 23 ).
Focus Mode
Standard
2
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 111 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• In 9 (Green) mode, you can only select = , q , or 3 .
• (1cm Macro) is unavailable in X (Digital Wide) mode.
• The focus mode is fixed at s in S (Fireworks) mode.
• The noise from focusing is recorded when a focus mode other than 3 or s
is selected in
C
(Movie) and (Underwater Movie) modes.
• When [Auto Macro] is on and shooting with q
selected, if the subject is further than 60 cm away, the camera automatically focuses to ∞
(Infinity).
Saving the Focus Mode setting 1
To Set the Manual Focus
The procedure for setting the focus manually ( \ ) is described below.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) in A mode.
The [Focus Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 5 ) to select \ .
3
Press the 4 button.
The central portion of the image is magnified to full screen on the display.
Focus Mode
Manual Focus
3
4
Press the four-way controller ( 23 ).
The \ indicator appears on the display to indicate the approximate distance to the subject. Use the fourway controller ( 23 ) to adjust the focus using the indicator as a guide.
2 for distant focus
3 for closer focus
2m
1
0.5
\
indicator
5
Press the 4 button.
The focus is fixed and the camera returns to capture mode.
After the focus is fixed, you can press the four-way controller ( 5 ) again to display the \ indicator and readjust the focus.
111
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 112 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
The shooting mode and drive mode cannot be changed while the \ indicator is displayed.
To switch from \ to another focus mode, press the four-way controller
(
5
) while the
\
indicator is displayed.
3
Changing the Focusing Area ( = area)
You can change the autofocus area (Focusing Area).
J
Multiple
K Spot
W
Automatic Tracking AF
Normal autofocus area
The autofocus area becomes smaller
Keeps moving subjects in focus
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [AF Setting].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [AF Setting] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Focusing Area].
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
AF Setting
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
MENU Cancel OK OK
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to change the Focusing
Area.
7
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
112
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 113 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
8
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• In C (Movie), (Underwater Movie) and
N
(Frame Composite) modes,
W
cannot be selected.
• In
S
(Fireworks),
9
(Green) and b (Auto Picture) modes, the focusing area is fixed at
J
.
Setting the Auto Macro
When [Auto Macro] is on, the focus is adjusted to the macro range
(distance to the subject is 10 cm to 60 cm) as necessary, even if the focus mode setting is AF (Standard).
When it is off and the focus mode is set to Standard ( = ), the AF operates only in the standard range, and focusing is not done in the macro range.
When the focus mode is set to Macro or 1cm Macro, the focus is only adjusted in the respective macro range and is not done in the standard range.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [AF Setting].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [AF Setting] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Auto Macro].
AF Setting
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
3
MENU
5
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O (On)/ P (Off).
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
113
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 114 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Setting the = Assist Light (Focus Assist)
The camera automatically emits the Focus assist light in dark shooting situations. You can set the light to on or off.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [AF Setting].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [AF Setting] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Focus Assist].
AF Setting
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
MENU
5
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O (On)/ P (Off).
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Looking at the light directly will not create a safety hazard. However, do not look into the emitter from a very short distance since you may feel dazzled.
The camera does not emit the Focus Assist light under the following conditions.
• In C (Movie), (Underwater Movie) or
S
(Fireworks) mode
• When the focus mode is set to 3 (Pan Focus), s (Infinity) or z
(Manual Focus).
114
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 115 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the Image Tone
For setting the tone of images.
You can select from [Bright], [Natural], or [Monochrome].
The default setting is [Bright].
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Image Tone].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select a finishing tone.
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
1/4
Bright
Natural
Monochrome
AWB
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• When [Monochrome] is selected, [Tone Adjustment] appears on the [
A
Rec. Mode] menu for setting the tone of monochrome images instead of [Saturation].
• Select [Monochrome] in (Report) mode to fix the Tone Adjustment setting to [Standard].
3
115
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 116 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels
You can choose recorded pixels settings for still pictures.
The larger the number of recorded pixels, the clearer the details will appear when you print your picture. As the quality of the printed picture also depends on the image quality, exposure control, resolution of the printer, and other factors, you do not need to select more than the required number of recorded pixels. h is adequate for making postcard-size prints.
The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the file size.
Refer to the following table for the appropriate settings according to expected usage.
Recorded Pixels g
4288×3216 j
3216×3216 i 4224×2376
6 3072×2304 f
3072×1728
2592×1944
2592×1464
Expected Usage
For printing high quality photos or A4-size pictures or larger, or editing images on a computer.
h 2048×1536 h
1920×1080 For making postcard-size prints.
V 1280×960 l 1024×768 m 640×480 For posting on a website or attaching to e-mail.
• The default setting is g
.
• V (1280×960) can only be set for recorded pixels when (Report) mode is set.
V does not appear in the Recorded Pixels menu.
If you select i
/ / / h
, the aspect ratio of the screen is 16:9. The monitor display for recording and playback is as shown on the right.
P
116
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 117 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Recorded
Pixels].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to change the number of recorded pixels.
Recordable Image No.
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
14
M
10 M
10 M
7
5
5
M
M
M
MENU Cancel
12
OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in
9
(Green) mode is fixed at g
.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in
N
(Frame
Composite) is fixed at h / h
.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in
X
(Digital
Wide) mode is fixed at f . (The number of recorded pixels will be h if you exit Digital Wide mode without taking the second picture.)
• The number of recorded pixels for images shot in (Report) mode is set to V (1280×960).
• If you take and save only the first frame in F (Digital Panorama) mode, the number of recorded pixels is fixed at i .
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in c (Digital SR) mode is fixed at f / .
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in (Digital
Microscope) mode is fixed at h
.
3
117
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 118 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Selecting the Quality Level of Still Pictures
Select the quality (data compression ratio) for still images according to how the images will be used.
The more stars ( E ), the higher the quality of the image, but the file size increases. The selected Recorded Pixels setting also affects the size of the image file (
Quality Level
C
D
E
Best
Better
Good
Lowest compression ratio. Suitable for photo prints.
Standard compression ratio. Suitable for viewing the image on a computer screen. (default setting)
Highest compression ratio. Suitable for attaching to e-mails or creating websites.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Quality Level].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to change the quality level.
The maximum number of pictures you can take is displayed at the top of the screen when you select a quality level.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Recordable Image No.
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
MENU Cancel
Bright
14 M
ڎڎڎ
ڎڎ
ڎ
OK
12
OK
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready for taking pictures.
In 9 (Green) mode, the quality level is fixed at D (Better).
118
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 119 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Adjusting the White Balance
You can take pictures in natural colors by adjusting the white balance according to the light conditions at the time of shooting.
F
G l
Auto
Daylight
Shade
The camera adjusts the white balance automatically.
Use this mode when taking pictures outside in sunlight.
Use this mode when taking pictures outside in the shade.
I
J
K
Manual Use this mode when adjusting the white balance manually.
• Set another white balance if you are not satisfied with the color balance of pictures taken with the white balance set to F .
• Depending on the selected shooting mode, the white balance setting
may not be changed. Refer to “Functions Available for Each Shooting
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [White Balance].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [White Balance] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to change the setting.
You can check the results of available white balance settings on the preview image each time you press the fourway controller.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
White Balance
3
119
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 120 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Refer to the following “Manual Setting” for instructions on adjusting the white balance manually.
If you change the [White Balance] setting frequently, you can save time
by assigning the Fn settings to the Green button (p.130).
Saving the White Balance setting
3
Manual Setting
Have a blank sheet of white paper or similar material ready.
1
In the [White Balance] screen, use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select K (Manual).
2
Point the camera at the blank sheet of paper or other material so that it fills the frame displayed in the center of the screen.
White Balance
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
The white balance is automatically adjusted.
4
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved and the screen returns to the [ A Rec. Mode] menu.
5
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
120
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 121 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the AE Metering
You can set the area of the screen where the brightness is metered to determine the exposure.
L
M
Multi-segment metering
Center-weighted metering
The camera divides the image into 256 areas, meters the brightness and determines the exposure.
The camera takes a reading of the overall brightness of the picture with the center of the image having more influence on the exposure.
N
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [AE Metering].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select a metering method.
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
1/4
Bright
14
M
ڎڎ
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway, the brightness is metered and the exposure is determined.
• When the subject is outside the focusing area and you want to use
Spot AE metering, aim the camera at the subject and press and hold the shutter release button halfway to lock the exposure, then compose your picture again and press the shutter release button fully.
• Depending on the selected shooting mode, the [AE Metering] setting
may not be changed. Refer to “Functions Available for Each Shooting
Saving the AE Metering setting 1
3
121
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 122 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Setting the Sensitivity
You can select the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.
The sensitivity is automatically adjusted by the camera.
(Default value: sensitivity 80-800)
AUTO
80
100
200
400
800
1600
3200
6400
The lower the sensitivity, the less noise that affects the image.
The shutter speed will be slower in low light conditions.
Higher sensitivity settings use faster shutter speeds in low light conditions to reduce camera shake, but the image may be affected by noise.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Sensitivity].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to change the sensitivity.
Rec. Mode
Sensitivity
AUTO ISO Range
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
AUTO
80
100
200
400
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
122
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 123 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• When the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400, the number of recorded
• pixels is fixed at
When set to c f (2592×1944)/ (2592×1464).
(Digital SR),
9
(Green),
C
(Movie), or
(Underwater Movie) mode, only [AUTO] is available.
• When set to
S
(Fireworks) mode, the sensitivity is fixed at 80.
• When the shooting mode is set to (Report), the AUTO is fixed at 80-6400. Other sensitivities can also be selected.
Saving the Sensitivity setting
1
Setting AUTO ISO Range
Set the sensitivity range when the sensitivity is set to AUTO.
The sensitivity can be set to 80-100, 80-200, 80-400, 80-800, and 80-1600.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [AUTO ISO
Range].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the sensitivity adjustment range.
Rec. Mode
Sensitivity
AUTO ISO Range
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
2/4
AUTO
ISO80-100
ISO80-200
ISO80-400
ISO80-800
ISO80-1600
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
When the Sensitivity is set to 80 or 100 and Highlight Correction is set to O (On), the setting changes to 160. The setting returns when
Highlight Correction is set to P (Off).
3
123
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 124 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Setting the Exposure (EV Compensation)
For adjusting the overall brightness of the picture.
Use this function to take pictures that are intentionally overexposed or underexposed.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select
[EV Compensation].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select the EV value.
To brighten, select a positive (+) value. To darken, select a negative
(–) value.
You can choose the EV setting in the range of –2.0 EV to +2.0 EV in 1/3 EV steps.
Rec. Mode
Sensitivity
AUTO ISO Range
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
MENU Exit
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
2/4
AUTO
ISO80-800
0.0
• When a histogram is displayed in Still Picture Capture mode or
Playback mode, you can check whether the exposure is correct (p.30).
• EV Compensation cannot be used in b (Auto Picture) or 9 (Green) mode.
Saving the EV Compensation setting
1
124
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 125 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Correcting the Brightness (D-Range Setting)
Expands the dynamic range and prevents bright and dark areas from occurring. [Highlight Correction] adjusts the bright areas when the image is too bright and [Shadow Correction] adjusts the dark areas when the image is too dark.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [D-Range
Setting].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [D-Range Setting] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Highlight
Correction] or [Shadow
Correction].
D-Range Setting
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
3
MENU
5
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O or P .
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture status.
The D-Range Setting icon appears on the display.
P
P
Q
O
When [Highlight Correction] is set to O
When [Shadow Correction] is set to O
When [Highlight Correction] and
[Shadow Correction] are set to O
38
• When the Sensitivity is set to 80 or 100 and Highlight Correction is set to
O
(On), the setting changes to 160. The setting returns when
Highlight Correction is set to P (Off).
• If you change the [Highlight Correction] or [Shadow Correction] setting
frequently, you can save time by assigning it to the Green button (p.130).
125
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 126 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
D-Range settings are not applicable in b (Auto Picture)/ 9 (Green) modes.
3
Setting Pixel Track SR
You can set this function to correct for camera shake when taking still shots. If Pixel Track SR is set to O (On), the camera automatically corrects for camera shake in the images you shot. The default setting is P (Off).
Shake reduction settings in
C
(Movie) and (Underwater Movie)
mode are configured under Movie SR (p.144).
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Pixel Track SR].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to switch between
O (On) or P (Off).
O
P
(On)
(Off)
Automatically corrects for camera shake.
No correction for camera shake.
The setting is saved.
Rec. Mode
Sensitivity
AUTO ISO Range
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
MENU Exit
2/4
AUTO
ISO80-800
0.0
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• In 9 (Green),
X
(Digital Wide), F (Digital Panorama), C (Movie),
(Underwater Movie),
N
(Frame Composite) and
S
(Fireworks) mode, the Pixel Track SR is fixed at P (Off).
• Pixel Track SR does not function when the flash discharges even if [Pixel Track SR] is set to
O
(On).
The Pixel Track SR may not be effective when the shutter speed is slow.
We recommend you turn off the [Pixel Track SR] setting P (off) and use a tripod for slow shutter speeds.
126
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 127 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the Interval Shooting
In this mode, a set number of pictures can be taken automatically at a set interval from a set time.
Interval
Number of Shots
10 sec. – 99 min.
2 shots – number of recordable images
Start Delay 0 min. – 24 hours
Set the camera to take pictures at intervals.
The intervals can be set in increments of one second from ten seconds to 4 minutes, or in
1 minute increments from 4 to 99 minutes.
You cannot set the camera to take interval shots for less than ten seconds.
You can set this to up to 1000 shots. However, it cannot exceed the number of recordable images.
You can set 1 minute increments for the first
59 minutes and 1 hour increments from there. If the start time is set to 0 minutes, the first picture is taken as soon as the shutter release button is pressed.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Interval Shoot].
Rec. Mode
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
3/4
MENU Exit
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Interval Shoot] setting screen appears. [Interval] is marked with the frame.
4
Set the interval.
1 Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
Interval Shoot
Interval 0 min.
10 sec.
2 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the minutes, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
Number of Shots
Start Delay
3 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the seconds, then press
MENU the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The setting is saved, and the frame returns to [Interval].
0 hr.
2
0 min.
3
127
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 128 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
5
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Number of Shots].
6
Set the number of shots.
1 Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
2 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set [Number of Shots], then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The setting is saved, and the frame returns to [Number of Shots].
7
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Start Delay].
8
Set the start delay.
Interval Shoot
1 Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The current time and the recording start time are displayed in real-time.
2 Use the four-way controller ( 23 )
Current Time
Start Time
Start Delay 0
10:00
10:00 hr.
0 min.
to set the hours, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
MENU Cancel OK OK
3 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the minutes, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The setting is saved, and the frame returns to [Start Delay].
9
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to the shooting screen. The operations up to this point have only configured the [Interval Shoot] settings. To actually use interval shooting, you must select [Interval Shoot] from the drive mode.
Taking Pictures at a Set Interval (Interval Shoot)
1
• Interval Shoot is unavailable in b (Auto Picture), 9 (Green),
F
(Digital Panorama),
X
(Digital Wide),
S
(Fireworks) and O (Voice Recording) modes.
•
Refer to p.145 for instructions on interval shooting for
C (Movie) and (Underwater Movie).
• Even if an alarm is set, the alarm will not ring while interval shooting is being performed.
• Interval Shoot stops if the SD Memory Card is removed or inserted during standby.
The Interval Shoot settings can also be configured from the Drive Mode
128
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 129 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting Blink Detection
This specifies whether Blink Detection works when you use the Face
Detection function. The default setting is O (On).
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Blink
Detection].
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to switch between O (On) or P (Off).
O (On) Blink Detection function works.
P (Off) Blink Detection function does not work.
The setting is saved.
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
MENU
Rec. Mode
Exit
3/4
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Blink Detection
If the Blink Detection function detected closed eyes when shooting,
[Closed eyes have been detected] is displayed for 3 seconds during
Instant Review.
3
129
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 130 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Setting the Instant Review
Use this setting to specify whether or not an Instant Review is displayed immediately after images are shot. The default setting is O (On: displays the image).
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Instant Review].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to switch between
O (On) or P (Off).
O
P
(On)
(Off)
Instant Review is displayed.
Instant Review is not displayed.
The setting is saved.
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
MENU
Rec. Mode
Exit
3/4
Instant Review 1
Setting the Green Button
You can assign one of the following functions to the Green button:
[Green Mode] (p.77), [Voice Recording] (p.208), [Movie] (p.141)
or [Fn Setting] (p.132). You can activate the assigned function by just
pressing the Green button.
When the shooting mode is set to
9
(Green) Mode, [Green Button] settings cannot be configured on the [ A Rec. Mode] menu. To configure the settings, first switch to a mode other than
9
.
130
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 131 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Assigning a Function
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Green Button].
Rec. Mode
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
MENU Exit
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select a function you want to assign.
Green Button
Green Mode
Voice Recording
Movie
Fn Setting
3/4
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• [Green Mode] is registered as the default setting.
• If you select [Movie] for both [Fn Setting] and Capture Mode, the Green
Button does not function because the modes are the same.
3
131
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 132 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Registering Frequently Used Functions (Fn Setting)
You can register frequently used functions on the four-way controller.
Using this function, you can directly set the functions by pressing the four-way controller without displaying the menu in Capture mode.
In [Fn Setting], still picture mode and Movie mode have different settings.
To execute [Fn Setting] in movie mode, press the MENU button in Movie
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Fn Setting].
Green Button
Green Mode
Voice Recording
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
WB White Balance
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The [Fn Setting] screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select a key you want to assign a function to.
Green Button
Fn Setting
WB
EV Compensation
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
MENU
7
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
8
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the function you want to register.
Green Button
WB
ISO
AF
EV Compensation
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
Sensitivity
Focusing Area
MENU Cancel
9
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
OK OK
132
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 133 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
10
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
This function is activated only when you assign the [Fn Setting] to the Green button.
You can assign only one function to each key.
The default settings for Fn settings
Still picture mode
Default setting (
2
) EV Compensation
( 3 ) Recorded Pixels
( 4 ) Quality Level
( 5 ) White Balance
Movie mode
(
2
) Movie SR
( 3 ) EV Compensation
( 4 ) Recorded Pixels
( 5 ) White Balance
Functions that can be assigned to each key
Selectable items
Still picture mode
EV Compensation
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
Sensitivity
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
AE Metering
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
Sharpness
Saturation (Tone Adjustment) *
Contrast
Movie mode
Recorded Pixels
Movie SR
White Balance
Focusing Area
EV Compensation
Sharpness
Saturation (Tone Adjustment) *
Contrast
* The items displayed change depending on the [Image Tone] selected on the [ A Rec. Mode] menu. When you have selected either [Bright] or [Natural], [Saturation] is displayed, and when [Monochrome] is selected, [Tone Adjustment] is displayed.
3
133
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 134 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Changing Assigned Items
Press the Green button in the shooting mode to display the Fn Setting screen. Select an item with the four-way controller ( 2345 ), and press either the ( 23 ) or ( 45 ) four-way controller to change the settings.
3
Setting the Image Sharpness (Sharpness)
You can give the image sharp or soft outlines.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Sharpness].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to change the sharpness level.
F Soft
G Normal
H Sharp
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light
MENU
Rec. Mode
Exit
4/4
Off
4
Press the 3 button.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
134
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 135 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the Saturation/Tone Adjustment
You can set either color brightness (Saturation) or the tone of monochrome images (Tone Adjustment).
The items displayed change depending on the [Image Tone] selected on the [ A Rec. Mode] menu.
Selected Image Tone
Bright, Natural
Monochrome
Displayed item
Saturation
Tone Adjustment
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Saturation]
(Tone Adjustment).
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select the level of saturation (or tone).
F Low (Blue for tone)
G Normal (B&W for tone)
Rec. Mode
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light
4/4
Off
H High (Sepia for tone) MENU Exit
4
Press the 3 button.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
3
135
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 136 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Setting the Image Contrast (Contrast)
For setting the image contrast level.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Contrast].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to change the contrast level.
F Low
G
Normal
Rec. Mode
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light
4/4
Off
MENU Exit
H High
4
Press the 3 button.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
Setting the Date Imprint Function
You can choose whether to imprint the date and/or time when taking still pictures.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Date Imprint].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the Date Imprint details.
Choose from [Date], [Date & Time],
[Time] or [Off].
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light
MENU
Rec. Mode
Cancel
4/4
Date
Date & Time
Time
Off
OK OK
136
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 137 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• The date and/or time imprinted with the [Date Imprint] function cannot be deleted.
• Note that if the printer or the image editing software is set to print the date and the images to be printed already have the date and/or time imprinted, the imprinted dates and/or times may overlap.
• O appears on the display in A mode when [Date Imprint] is set to any setting other than [Off].
• The date and/or time are imprinted on the picture with the display
format set in the [Date Adjustment] screen (p.49).
Setting the IQ Enhancer Processing
You can take pictures with clearer details by using image processing with IQ enhancer technique.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [IQ Enhancer].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select O (On)/
P (Off).
O (On) IQ enhancer function works
P (Off) IQ enhancer function does not work
The setting is saved.
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light
MENU
Rec. Mode
Exit
4/4
Off
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
3
137
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 138 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
IQ enhancer does not function in the following situations:
• When the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400
• In the c (Digital SR) mode
• When the drive mode is set to c (Burst Shooting)
3
Setting the Macro Light
Set whether or not to turn on the macro lights around the lens.
The macro lights turn on when the [Macro Light] is set to O (On).
The default setting is P (Off).
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Macro Light].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select O (On)/
P (Off).
O (On) Turns on the light
P (Off) Turns off the light
The setting is saved.
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light
MENU
Rec. Mode
Exit
4/4
Off
• In (Digital Microscope) mode, the macro lights turn on regardless of whether the setting is turned on or off.
• If the Power Saving is set to on, the light turns off after the set time.
• The macro lights turn off during playback and when using the USB connector except when outputting video in Digital Microscope mode.
• Self-portrait Assist and Self-portrait Assist + Smile Capture cannot be selected when [Macro Light] is set to O (On).
If you take a picture using Self Timer or Remote Control while
[Macro Light] is set to O (On), the macro lights remain on regardless of the countdown.
138
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 139 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Taking Pictures Underwater
Taking Underwater Pictures (Underwater Mode/
Underwater Movie Mode)
This camera complies with JIS waterproof grade 8 and can be used to take pictures at a depth of 10 m continuously for 2 hours. In addition, this camera complies with JIS dustproof grade 6 (IP68).
Use the Underwater mode to take underwater still pictures that capture the blueness of the sea.
Use the Underwater Movie mode to record movies underwater.
3
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select
(Underwater) or (Underwater Movie).
3
Press the 4 button.
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
If you selected , the picture is taken.
If you selected , recording starts. To stop recording, press the shutter release button fully. Perform the same steps as C (Movie) mode to record movies.
139
3
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 140 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• Before taking pictures underwater, make sure that there is no dirt or sand on the waterproof seal of the battery/card and terminal covers and check that the covers are securely locked.
• Before opening the battery/card and terminal covers after using the camera underwater, make sure that there is no water, dirt, or sand on the covers or anywhere else on the camera. Wipe the camera before opening the covers.
• In mode, AE metering is set to multi-segment metering.
Regarding Waterproof, Dustproof, and Shockproof Design 1 p.9
• The flash will not discharge in mode.
• When the Focus Mode is set to \ , you can adjust the focus before recording starts and during recording.
• Optical and digital zoom can be used in Underwater Movie mode before recording starts. Digital Zoom can also be used during recording.
Although the camera is designed to be waterproof and dustproof, avoid using the camera under the following conditions. It may momentarily be subjected to water pressure beyond that covered in the guarantee and water may enter the interior of the camera.
• Jumping into the water while holding the camera
• Swimming while holding the camera in your hand
• Using the camera in environments where water is applied forcefully, such as strong river currents and waterfalls
140
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 141 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Recording Movies
Recording Movies
This mode enables you to record movies. Sound is recorded at the same time.
Shutter release button w / x button
3
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select C (Movie).
Movie
For recording movies
MENU Cancel
3
Press the 4 button.
1
C (Movie) mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
The following information appears on the display.
1 Movie mode icon
2 Movie shake reduction icon
3 Remaining recordable time
4 REC indicator (blinks during
2
REC
07:34
3 4 recording)
5 Focus frame (does not appear during recording)
5
1/2
OK OK
141
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 142 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
You can change the captured area by pressing the w / x button.
x Enlarges the subject w Widens the area that is captured by the camera
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording starts. You can continue recording until the built-in memory or the SD Memory Card is full, or the size of the recorded movie reaches 2 GB.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording stops.
1
• The flash does not discharge in
C
(Movie) and (Underwater
Movie) modes.
• The focus mode can be changed before recording starts.
• When the focus mode is set to \ (Manual Focus), you can adjust the focus before recording starts.
• Optical and digital zoom can be used before recording starts.
Digital zoom is available during recording when digital zoom (p.81)
is set to
O
(On).
• When the shooting mode is set to
C
(Movie) or (Underwater
Movie), Face Detection is automatically set to on. You can select Smile
Capture or Face Detection Off by pressing the
I
button before
starting recording a movie (p.71). When Smile Capture function
is activated, movie recording starts automatically when the camera recognizes the subject’s smile. However, depending on the condition of the recognized faces, movie recording may not start automatically because the Smile Capture function may not work. If this happens, press the shutter release button to start movie recording.
• The volume of recorded audio may vary depending on the orientation of the microphone, which is on the front of the camera.
•
You can record a movie using the remote control unit (optional) (p.97).
• When you change the display by pressing the 4 / W button while recording a movie, the histogram is not displayed.
142
Keeping the Shutter Release Button Pressed
If you keep the shutter release button pressed for more than one second, recording will continue as long as you keep the button pressed. Shooting stops when you take your finger off the shutter release button.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 143 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels and
Frame Rate for Movies
You can choose the number of recorded pixels and frame rate settings for movies.
The more pixels there are, the clearer the details and the bigger the file size. The more frames per second, the better the quality of the movie, but the file size becomes larger.
Frame
Rate
Use
M 1280×720 30 fps Records images in HDTV format (16:9).
F
1280×720 15 fps
Records images in HDTV format (16:9).
Increases the total recording time by making the file size smaller.
G
640×480
H
640×480
I
320×240
J 320×240 15 fps
Suitable for posting on a website or attaching to e-mail. Increases the total recording time by making the file size smaller.
* The frame rate (fps) indicates the number of frames per second.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Movie].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Movie] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Recorded
Pixels].
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
3
143
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 144 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
6
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to change the number of recorded pixels and frame rate.
Rec. Time
Recorded Pixels
Movie SR
Interval Shoot
02:26
MENU Cancel OK OK
3
7
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
8
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
The following restrictions may cause the selected recording time and the actual recording time to be different.
• The maximum size of a file is limited to 2 GB.
Setting the Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction)
Function
In C (Movie) mode, you can compensate for camera shake while you are recording a movie with the Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction) function.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Movie].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Movie] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Movie SR].
144
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 145 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select O (On) or P (Off).
O (On) Automatically corrects for camera shake.
P (Off) No correction for camera shake.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Movie
Recorded Pixels
Movie SR
Interval Shoot
MENU
Recording a Movie from Pictures Taken at a Set
Interval (Interval Movie)
In this mode, you can record multiple still pictures taken automatically at a set interval from a set time, as a movie file.
Interval
Total Time
Start Delay
You can set this to 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour.
Set the total time, from 10 minutes to 359 hours. The total time and the settable units change depending on the interval set. The Interval can be set in increments of 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour.
Set the start delay, from 0 minutes to 24 hours. The start delay can be set in increments of 1 minute for a delay time up to 59 minutes, and increments of 1 hour for a delay time longer than one hour. If the start time is set to 0 minutes, the first picture is taken as soon as the shutter release button is pressed.
3
Setting from Drive Mode
1
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) in C or mode.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select k (Interval
Shoot) and press the 4 button.
The current Interval Movie setting appears for approximately one minute. To take pictures with the current settings, go to step 10.
Drive Mode
Interval Shoot
145
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 146 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
3
Press the 4 button while the settings are displayed.
The Interval Movie setting screen appears. [Interval] is marked with the frame.
4
Set the interval.
1 Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
Interval Shoot
Interval
Total Time
1 min.
0 hr.
10 min.
2 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the interval, then press the 4 button.
The frame returns to [Interval].
5
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Total Time].
6
Set the total time.
1 Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
Start Delay
MENU
0 hr.
min.
2 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the hours, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
3 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the minutes, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame returns to [Total Time].
7
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Start Delay].
8
Set the start delay.
1 Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
2 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the hours, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
3 Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the minutes, then press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame returns to [Start Delay].
9
Press the 3 button.
The Interval movie setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
146
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 147 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
10
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green if the subject is in focus.
11
Press the shutter release button fully.
Interval movie recording starts.
The LCD turns off between shots (during standby). Press the power switch during standby to display the remaining time and interval on the monitor.
The [Stop interval shooting?] message is displayed when the power switch and then the 3 button are pressed during standby.
Pressing the 4 button cancels interval movie.
Setting from Menu
You can set the Interval Movie from [ A Rec. Mode] menu.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Movie].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Movie] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Interval Shoot].
Movie
Recorded Pixels
Movie SR
Interval Shoot
3
MENU
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The interval movie setting screen appears. The rest of the procedure is the same as steps 4-11 in “Setting from Drive Mode”. See those procedures if you need more information.
147
3
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 148 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• Confirm that the battery is sufficiently charged before starting interval movie recording. If the battery is not sufficiently charged, it may become depleted during interval movie recording and cause recording of the movie to stop.
• When performing interval movie shooting, the settings are fixed as follows; Recorded Pixels: V (1280×720), Quality Level: C , Movie
SR: P (Off), and Flash Mode: a
. However, shooting is done at a frame
rate according to the recorded pixels (p.143) set on the Movie menu.
• Interval Shoot stops if the SD Memory Card is removed or inserted during standby.
• Sound cannot be recorded in Interval Movie mode.
• When you use the SD Memory Card, use SD Speed Class 4 or higher cards.
• If you set a start delay, a start time corresponding to the current time and the start delay you set is displayed in real time.
• The total time you can set differs according to the shooting interval you set, as indicated in the table below.
Interval
1 min
5 min
10 min
30 min
1 hr
30 fps
Total time that can be set
15 fps
10 minutes to 5 hours and 59 minutes
(in increments of 1 minute)
30 minutes to 29 hours and 55 minutes
(in increments of 5 minutes)
10 minutes to 5 hours and 59 minutes
(in increments of 1 minute)
15 minutes to 29 hours and 55 minutes
(in increments of 5 minutes)
1 hour to 59 hours and 50 minutes
(in increments of 10 minutes)
3 hours to 179 hours and 30 minutes
(in increments of 30 minutes)
6 hours to 359 hours
(in increments of 1 hour)
30 minutes to 59 hours and 50 minutes
(in increments of 10 minutes)
1 hour and 30 minutes to 179 hours and 30 minutes
(in increments of 30 minutes)
3 hours to 359 hours
(in increments of 1 hour)
148
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 149 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Saving the Settings (Memory)
The Memory function is for saving the current camera settings when the camera is turned off.
For some camera settings, the Memory function is always set to O (On)
(the settings are saved when the camera is turned off), while for others you can choose on or off (to choose whether the settings are saved or not when the camera is turned off). The items which can be set to On or Off in the Memory function are shown in the table below. (Items not listed here are always saved in the selected settings when the camera is turned off.)
If you select O (On), the settings will be saved in the status they were in immediately before the camera was turned off. If you select P (Off), the settings will be reset to the defaults when the camera is turned off.
The table below also shows whether the Memory default setting for each item is on or off.
Item
Face Detection
Default setting
P
Page
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
Focus Mode
Zoom Position
MF Position
White Balance
Sensitivity
Description
A Face Detection mode set by using the
I button
The flash mode set with the four-way controller (
4
)
The drive mode set with the four-way controller ( 2 )
The focus mode set with the four-way controller ( 5 )
The zoom position set with the w
/ x
button
The manual focus position set with the four-way controller ( 23 )
The [White Balance] setting on the [
A
Rec.
Mode] menu
The [Sensitivity] setting on the [ A Rec.
Mode] menu
O
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
AE Metering
Digital Zoom
DISPLAY
File No.
the [ A Rec. Mode] menu
The [AE Metering] setting on the [ A Rec.
Mode] menu
The [Digital Zoom] setting on the [
A
Rec.
Mode] menu
The display information display mode set with the 4 / W button
If a new SD Memory Card is inserted when
On has been selected, file numbers are assigned sequentially
P
O
P
O
⎯
3
149
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 150 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Memory].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Memory] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to choose an item.
Memory 1/3
Face Detection
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
Focus Mode
Zoom Position
MF Position
MENU
5
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O (On) or P (Off).
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
150
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 151 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4Playing Back and
Deleting Images
Playing Back Images
Playing Back Still Pictures
1
Press the Q button after taking a picture.
The camera enters the Q mode and the image appears on the display.
Displaying one image in full in Q mode
( Q mode default setting) is called single-image display.
To Play Back the Previous or Next Image
2
Press the four-way controller ( 45 ).
The previous or next image appears.
To Delete the Displayed Image
Press the i button while the image is displayed to display the Delete screen.
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select
[Delete] and press the 4 button.
Edit
Q button
Four-way controller
4 button i button
File number
4
Delete
Cancel
For information on other deletion procedures 1
151
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 152 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Playing Back a Movie
You can play back the movies you have taken. The sound is played back at the same time.
f / y button
Q button
Four-way controller
4 1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the movie you want to play back.
2
Press the four-way controller
( 2 ).
Playback starts.
1 0 0 0 0 1 7
0 0 :
Edit
The following operations can be performed during playback.
Four-way controller ( 4 )
Four-way controller ( 2 )
Zoom button ( y )
Zoom button ( f )
Plays back in reverse
Pauses playback
Increases the volume
Reduces the volume
Press and hold the four-way controller ( 5 ) Fast-forwards playback
Press and hold the four-way controller ( 4 ) Fast-reverses playback
The following operations can be performed while playback is paused.
Four-way controller ( 4 )
Four-way controller (
Four-way controller (
5
2
)
)
Reverses the frame
Forwards the frame
Resumes playback
3
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
Playback stops.
152
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 153 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Multi-Image Display
f / y button
Q
button
3 button
Four-way controller
4 button
6 Image Display/12 Image Display
You can display 6 or 12 thumbnails of captured images at a time.
1
Press the f button in Q mode.
The 6 image display appears showing a page consisting of 6 thumbnail images. Pressing the f button again changes it to a 12 image display.
A page consisting of 6 or 12 thumbnail images appears. The displayed images change 6- or 12-images at a time page by page.
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to move the frame. If there are too many images to fit on one page, pressing the four-way controller ( 24 ) while image 1 is selected will display the previous page. Similarly, if you choose image 2 and press the fourway controller ( 35 ), the next page appears.
♦ indicates that the previous or next screen is stored in a separate folder.
Select & Delete
6 Image Display
100-0010
Folder divider icon
Frame
1
1
2
2
Select & Delete
12 Image Display
100-0010
4
153
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 154 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
The icons that appear on the images indicate the following:
O
C
(No icon)
(With image)
Still picture without sound
Still picture with sound
Movie (the first frame appears)
O (Without image) Sound files only
Press the 4 button to switch to single-image display of the selected image.
Press the Q button to switch to A mode.
4
Folder Display/Calendar Display
Press the f button in 12 image display to switch to folder or calendar display. Press the Green button to switch between folder display and calendar display.
1
Press the f button twice in Q mode.
The screen changes to 12 image display.
2
Press the f button.
The screen changes to folder display or calendar display.
Folder display
The list of folders with recorded images and sound files appears.
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to move the frame.
If you select a folder and press the y button or the 4 button, images in the folder are displayed in 12 image display.
Frame
101
10 5
102
10 6
103 10 4
101 _ 0707
154
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 155 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Calendar display
Recorded images and sound files are displayed by date in calendar format.
The first image recorded on a date is displayed for that date on the calendar.
O appears for dates on which the first recorded file was either sound-only data or a still picture with a voice
33 44
2 5
65
2 6
66
Frame
77 88
1 5
22
99
1 6 memo.
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to move the frame.
If you select a date and press the y button, images taken on that date are displayed in 12 image display.
Select a date and press the 4 button to switch to single-image display of the first image recorded on that date.
• Press the 3 button in folder display or calendar display to switch to 12 image display.
• Press the Q button or half-press the shutter release button in folder display or calendar display to switch to A mode.
4
Using the Playback Function
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to choose an icon.
The guide for the selected function appears below.
Slideshow
F o r c o n t i n u o u s l y p l a y i n g b a c k i m a g e s . S c r e e n o r s o u n d e f f e c t s c a n b e s e t
MENU Cancel
1 / 2
OK OK
3
Press the 4 button.
The playback function is recalled.
155
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 156 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
Edit
MENU
Slideshow 1 / 2 Image Rotation 1 / 2
F o r c o n t i n u o u s l y p l a y i n g b a c k i m a g e s . S c r e e n o r s o u n d e f f e c t s c a n b e s e t
MENU Cancel OK OK
Press or
SHUTTER halfway
R o t a t e s c a p t u r e d i m a g e s .
U s e f u l w h e n v i e w i n g v e r t i c a l i m a g e s o n a T V
MENU Cancel OK OK
OK
3 8
Closes the Playback Mode
Palette and goes to A mode.
MENU Cancel OK OK
Goes to the screen for selected playback function.
• When the frame is placed over an icon on the Playback Mode Palette, a guide for that function appears.
• You can turn the guide display off for the function on the Playback
156
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 157 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Playback Mode Palette
Playback Mode u Slideshow s Image Rotation k
Small Face Filter
Description
For continuously playing back images. Screen or sound effects can be set
Rotates captured images. Useful when viewing vertical images on a TV
Reduces the size of faces in the image, for wellproportioned portraits
Page
P
Collage
Digital Filter
E Original Frame
Creates a collage print page from saved image files p.186
For modifying images with a Color filter or Soft filter p.180
Available to make from the kind and color of a frame. Available to enter text
N
[
Z n o
Movie
Editing
Save as
Still image For saving one frame from a movie as a still picture
Divide
Movies
For dividing a movie into two
Adding title picture For adding a title picture to your movie
Red-eye
Compensation
For compensating red-eye. May not work due to the condition of the image
Resize
Cropping
Changes Recorded Pixels and Quality Level to make the file size smaller
For cropping images to the size you like.
Saved as a new image
p Image/Sound Copy For copying images and sounds between the builtin
\
Z
Protect r
^
Voice Memo
DPOF
Start-up Screen
Attaches sound to images. Recording is possible till the memory card is full
Protects images and sounds from accidental deletion. Formatting will delete
For the print settings. Useful when printing at a printing service
For setting a captured image as the Start-up
Screen
4
157
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 158 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
Slideshow
You can play back recorded images and movies one after another.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image to start the slideshow with.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select u (Slideshow).
Slideshow 1 / 2
F o r c o n t i n u o u s l y p l a y i n g b a c k i m a g e s . S c r e e n o r s o u n d e f f e c t s c a n b e s e t
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The slideshow setting screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Start].
Slideshow starts
Interval
Screen Effect
Sound Effect
Start
3sec.
Wipe
MENU OK
6
Press the 4 button.
The slideshow starts.
Pressing the 4 button during the slideshow pauses the slideshow.
To resume the slideshow, press the 4 button again.
7
Press any button other than the 4 button.
The slideshow stops.
158
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 159 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To Set the Slideshow Conditions
You can set the playback interval and also a screen effect and sound effect for when one image changes to the next.
1
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Interval]
Interval
Screen Effect
Sound Effect
3sec.
Wipe
MENU
2
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to change the interval and press the 4 button.
Choose from [3sec.], [5sec.], [10sec.], [20sec.] or [30sec.].
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Screen Effect].
After selecting [Screen Effect], press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears with the following items. Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select an item and press the 4 button.
Wipe
Checker
Fade
Random
Off
The next image slides over the previous one from left to right
The next image appears in small square mosaic blocks
The current image gradually fades out and the next image fades in
Various effects are used randomly
No effect
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Sound Effect].
6
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O (On) or
P (Off).
Except when the [Screen Effect] is set to Off, you can choose O (On) or P (Off) for the sound that is played when one image changes to the next.
7
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Start].
4
159
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 160 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
8
Press the 4 button.
The slideshow starts using the selected interval and effect.
• The slideshow will continue until you press any button other than the 4 button.
• Movies or pictures with sound will be played through to the end before the next picture is played back, regardless of the interval setting.
However, pressing the four-way controller (
5
) while playing back a movie or a picture with sound skips to the next image.
• Sound files made in O (Voice Recording) are not played back in the slideshow.
• Panorama images are displayed by scrolling from left to right in 4 seconds before the next picture is played back, regardless of the Interval or Screen Effect setting.
• When [Random] is selected for the screen effect, the interval is fixed and the sound effect is set to off. Also the sound of pictures with sound will not be played back.
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment
160
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 161 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Rotating the Image
Q button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the Q button after taking a picture.
The image appears on the display.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select s (Image Rotation) and press the 4 button.
The rotation selection screen (0°, Right 90°, Left 90°, or 180°) appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to choose the rotation direction and press the 4 button.
The rotated image is saved.
MENU Cancel OK OK
• Panoramic images and movies cannot be rotated.
• Protected images can be rotated, but they cannot be saved in a rotated state.
4
161
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 162 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Zoom Playback
You can magnify an image up to ten times.
f
/ y
button
Q button
Four-way controller
4 button
4
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image you want to magnify.
2
Press the y button.
The image is magnified (×1.1 to ×10). Holding down the y button continuously magnifies the image.
With Quick Zoom (p.235) set to
O (On), pressing y once magnifies the image to 10×.
You can use the + mark of the guide at the bottom left of the screen to check which portion of the image is magnified.
The following operations can be performed while an image is magnified.
Guide
Four-way controller ( 2345 ) Moves the position to be magnified
Zoom button right ( y ) Makes the image bigger (max. of 10×)
Zoom button left ( f ) Makes the image smaller (min. of 1.1×)
3
Press the 4 button.
The image returns to single-image display.
Movies cannot be magnified.
162
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 163 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Zoom In on the Subject’s Face Automatically
(Face Close-up Playback)
You can enjoy playing back images with the subject’s faces zoomed up simply by pressing the I button (Face close-up playback) if the Face
Detection function operated when the images were taken.
f
/ y
button
Q button
I button
Four-way controller
4 button
4
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image you want to magnify.
2
Confirm that the
I
icon is displayed in the image and press the
I
button.
The image is magnified around the face first recognized when the image was taken.
If multiple faces were recognized when the image was taken, the subject’s faces are zoomed up on each time the I button is pressed in order of the recognition during shooting.
163
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 164 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
The following operations can be performed during Face close-up playback mode.
Zoom button right ( y )
Zoom button left ( f )
Zooms up on the subject being displayed for
Face close-up playback at an equal or slightly larger magnification ratio.
Zooms up on the subject being displayed for
Face close-up playback at an equal or slightly smaller magnification ratio.
3
Press the 4 button.
The image returns to single-image display.
• Face close-up playback is not available for images that are saved as still pictures from the movies.
• The magnification ratio for Face close-up playback may differ depending on the conditions such as the size of the face recognized when shooting.
• Face close-up playback is also available for pet’s faces recorded in e
(Pet) mode.
164
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 165 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Deleting Images and Sound Files
Delete images and sound files that you do not want to keep.
Deleting a Single Image/Sound File
You can delete a single image or sound file.
Protected images and sound files cannot be deleted (p.169).
Q
button
Four-way controller
4 button i
button
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image/sound file you want to delete.
2
Press the i button.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Delete].
4
Delete
Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The image is deleted.
165
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 166 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
To Delete a Sound File
If sound (voice memo) has been recorded with an image (p.212),
you can delete the sound without deleting the image.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image with sound.
U appears on the images with sound.
2
Press the i button.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Delete Sound].
Delete Sound
Delete
Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The sound file is deleted.
• Select [Delete] in step 3 to delete both the image and sound file.
• You cannot delete only the sound in a movie.
166
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 167 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Deleting Selected Images and Sound Files
You can delete several images/sound files selected from the 6- or
12 image display at once.
Protected images and sound files cannot be deleted (p.169).
f / y button
Q
button
Four-way controller
4 button i button
1
Press the f button once or twice in Q mode.
6 image display or 12 image display appears.
2
Press the i button.
P appears on the images and sound files.
4
OK MENU Cancel Delete
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to choose the images and sound files that you want to delete and press the 4 button.
O appears on the selected images and sound files.
MENU Cancel Delete OK
Pressing and holding the y button displays the selected image in a single screen and you can check whether to delete the image.
Releasing the button returns to 6- or 12 image display. However, protected images cannot be displayed in single-image display.
167
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 168 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
Press the i button.
A confirmation screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Select & Delete].
MENU
6
Press the 4 button.
The selected images and sound files are deleted.
Delete all selected images/sounds?
Select & Delete
Cancel
4
Deleting All Images and Sound Files
Deletes all the images and sound files at once.
Protected images and sound files cannot be deleted (p.169).
OK OK
Q button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
168
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 169 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
2
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Delete All].
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
MENU Exit
5sec.
3min.
3/4
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A confirmation dialog appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Delete All].
Delete All
Delete all images/sounds?
Delete All
Cancel
OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
All the images and sound files are deleted.
Protecting Images and Sound Files from Deletion
(Protect)
You can protect stored images and sound files from being accidentally deleted.
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image you want to protect.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select
Z (Protect).
Protect
Protects images and sounds from accidental deletion.
Formatting will delete
MENU Cancel OK
2/2
OK
4
169
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 170 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
Press the 4 button.
The screen for selecting [Single Image/Sound] or [All Images/Sounds] appears.
5
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Single Image/Sound].
Single Image/Sound
4
6
Press the 4 button.
The message [Protects this image/sound] appears.
To protect another image or sound file, use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select another image or sound file.
7
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Protect].
Protects this image/sound
Protect
Unprotect
Cancel
8
Press the 4 button.
The selected image or sound file is protected.
To protect other images or sound files, repeat Steps 5 to 8.
Select [Cancel] to exit the Protect settings.
• To cancel the Protect setting, select [Unprotect] in step 7.
• Y appears on the protected images and sound files during playback.
170
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 171 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To Protect All Images and Sound Files
1
Select [All Images/Sounds]
All Images/Sounds
2
Press the 4 button.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Protect].
Protects all images/sounds
Protect
Unprotect
Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
All the images and sound files are protected and the screen shown in Step 1 reappears.
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Cancel] and press the 4 button.
The Playback Mode Palette reappears.
Protected images and sound files are deleted when the SD Memory
Card or the built-in memory is formatted (p.214).
To cancel the Protect setting on all your images and sound files, select
[Unprotect] in step 3.
4
171
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 172 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment
4
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video IN jack or HDMl terminal and playback images.
• The power lamp on the camera lights up during a connection.
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use
of the AC adapter kit K-AC117 (optional) is recommended. (p.38)
• For AV equipment with multiple video IN jacks, check the operating manual of the AV device, and select the video IN jack to which the camera is connected.
• You cannot output composite and HDMI video at the same time.
• The camera display turns off while the camera is connected to AV equipment.
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera when connected to an AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.
• When the camera is connected to an AV device, you can change the images with the remote control (optional).
Connecting the Camera to a Video IN Jack
By using the optional AV cable (I-AVC7), you can capture and play back images on equipment with a video IN jack, such as a TV.
External Input
Terminal
VIDEO
AUDIO
(L) (R)
PC/AV terminal
Yellow White
172
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 173 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover.
Move the terminal cover lock lever in the direction shown by 1 , slide the cover in the direction shown by 2 and open the cover in the direction shown by 3 .
3
Connect the AV cable to the PC/AV terminal.
4
Connect the other ends of the AV cable (yellow: video, white: audio) to the video input terminal and audio input terminal of the AV device.
When using stereo sound equipment, insert the sound terminal into the L (white) terminal.
5
Turn the AV device on.
When the device that the camera is connected to and the device that plays back images are different, turn both devices on.
When viewing images on AV equipment with multiple video input terminals (such as a TV), refer to the operation manual of the device and select the video input terminal to which to connect the camera.
6
Turn the camera on.
• Depending on the country or region, images and sound files may fail to be played back if the video output format is set different from the one in use there. If this happens, change the video output format setting
• The camera’s AV output is output at normal resolution.
To watch movies shot at
M
or F at HDTV resolution, output
the movies as HDMI or transfer them to a computer (p.174).
Close the terminal cover securely when not using the terminal.
<How to close the terminal cover>
Close the cover in the opposite direction indicated by 3 . While lightly pressing on the terminal cover, slide it away from 2 until it clicks.
4
173
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 174 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal
Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to a device with an HDMI terminal.
HDMI terminal
4
174
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover.
Move the terminal cover lock lever in the direction shown by 1 , slide the cover in the direction shown by 2 and open the cover in the direction shown by 3 .
3
Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI terminal.
4
Connect the other end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN jack on the AV device.
5
Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera information is displayed on the screen of the connected
AV device.
• The camera has a Type D (Micro) HDMI terminal. Use a commercially available HDMI cable that matches your AV device.
• If you playback the movie by connecting the camera to an AV device with a commercially available HDMI cable, set the output format
to “Selecting the HDMI Output Format” (p.229).
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 175 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Close the terminal cover securely when not using the terminal.
<How to close the terminal cover>
Close the cover in the opposite direction indicated by 3 . While lightly pressing on the terminal cover, slide it away from 2 until it clicks.
4
175
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 176 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Editing Images
Changing the Image Size (Resize)
By changing the size and quality of a selected image, you can make the file size smaller than the original. You can use this function to continue taking pictures when the SD Memory Card or the built-in memory is full, by making the images smaller and overwriting the original images to make more space available.
• Images taken with the recorded pixels of j
(3216×3216) or panoramic images and movies cannot be resized.
• You cannot select a larger resolution and higher Quality Level than that of the original image.
5
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image you want to resize.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select n (Resize).
R esize 1 / 2
C h a n g e s
R e c o r d e d P i x e l s a n d Q u a l i t y L e v e l t o m a k e t h e f i l e s i z e s m a l l e r
MEN
U
Cancel
O
K
O
K
4
Press the 4 button.
The screen for choosing the image size appears.
5
Select [Recorded Pixels] and
[Quality Level].
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the size and quality.
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to switch between [Recorded Pixels] and [Quality Level].
MEN
U
R ecorded Pixels
Quality Level
14M
O
K
O
K
176
5Editing and Printing
Images
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 177 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
6
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
7
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Overwrite] or [Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
8
Press the 4 button.
The resized image is saved.
Cropping Images
You can delete the unwanted part of a picture and save the cropped image as a separate image.
Images taken with the recorded pixels of j
(3216×3216) or panoramic images and movies cannot be cropped.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image you want to crop.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select o (Cropping).
Cropping 1/2
For cropping images to the size you like. Saved as a new image
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
177
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 178 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
4
Press the 4 button.
The cropping screen appears.
The largest size of the cropped image is shown with a green frame on the screen. The cropped image cannot be larger than this cropping frame size.
5
Choose the cropping area.
The following operations move the green frame and set the area for cropping on the screen.
Zoom button
( f
/ y
)
Four-way controller
( 2345 )
Changes the size of the cropped section
Moves the cropping position up, down, left and right
Green Button Rotates the cropping frame
• The button is only displayed when the cropping frame size can be rotated.
6
Press the 4 button.
The cropped image is saved with a new file name.
The number of recorded pixels is selected automatically according to the size of the cropped section. The image is saved at the same quality level as the original.
Processing Images to Make Faces Look Smaller
Images are processed to reduce the size of people’s faces detected with
the Face Detection function (p.71) when taking pictures so that they look
smaller.
1
In Q mode, use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image you want to edit.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
178
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 179 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select k
(Small Face Filter).
Small Face Filter 1/2
Reduces the size of faces in the image, for wellproportioned portraits
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
Face detection frames for faces that can be corrected are displayed.
Proceed to Step 6 when there is only one detection frame.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select a face to be processed.
A green frame indicates the face that is to be processed.
6
Press the 4 button.
7
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to change the reduction ratio.
F Approx. 5%
G Approx. 7%
H Approx. 10%
8
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation dialog does not appear.
9
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Overwrite] or [Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
179
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 180 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
10
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to Q mode and the processed image is displayed.
You may not be able to process images in the following situations:
• When the size of face taken in relation to an image is too large or too small
• When faces are located in the edges of an image
In such cases, the face detection frame in Step 4 will not appear.
5
Using the Digital Filters
This mode lets you change the color tones and perform special processing on a selected image.
B&W/Sepia
Toy Camera
Retro
Changes color images to black and white or processes usnig the sepia filter.
Images seem to have been taken with a toy camera.
Images have the feel of old photos with a white border. You can choose from three filters: Original image, amber, and blue.
Color
Extract Color
Processes the image using the selected color filter. You can choose from six filters: red, pink, purple, blue, green, and yellow.
Processes the image using the selected color extraction filter.
You can choose from three filters: red, green, and blue.
Color Emphasis There are 4 filters: Sky Blue/Fresh Green/Delicate Pink/Autumn
Leaves.
High Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the captured images.
Starburst Processes the image with a special sparkling look achieved by adding cross-like effects to a highlighted area, such as town lights at night, light reflected from water, or other light sources.
You can choose from three filters: Cross, Heart, and Star.
Soft
Fish-eye
Processes the image into a soft image that appears soft overall.
Applies a fish-eye lens effect to images.
Brightness
Miniature
Adjusts the brightness of the image.
Blurs part of the image to create a fake miniature scene.
Panoramic images, movies or images taken with another camera cannot be edited using Digital Filter function. An error message appears if you choose this function from the Playback Mode Palette and press the 4 button.
180
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 181 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image you want to edit.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select
P
(Digital Filter).
Digital Filter 1/2
For modifying images with a Color filter or Soft filter
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The digital filter selection screen appears.
1 B&W/Sepia
2 Toy Camera
3 Retro
4 Color
5 Extract Color
6 Color Emphasis
7 High Contrast
8 Starburst
9 Soft
10 Fish-eye
11 Brightness
12 Miniature
11
7
9
1 2
4
6
4
6
8
10
3
5 5
7
9
11
Subsequent steps vary depending on your selection.
5
181
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 182 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To Select a Soft Filter
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose a digital filter you want to use.
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.
6
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
7
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Overwrite] or [Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
8
Press the 4 button.
The images processed with the filter are saved.
182
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 183 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To Select a B&W/Sepia, Retro, Color, Extract Color, Color Emphasis or Starburst Filter
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose the digital filter you want to use.
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.
6
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to choose the effect.
Retro
Four-way controller
( 4 )
Blue
Default Setting
Original image
Four-way controller
( 5 )
Amber
B&W/Sepia B&W ↔ Sepia
Color Red ↔ Pink ↔ Purple ↔ Blue ↔ Green ↔ Yellow
Extract Color Red ↔ Green ↔ Blue
Color Emphasis Sky Blue ↔ Fresh Green ↔ Delicate Pink ↔ Autumn Leaves
Starburst Cross ↔ Heart ↔ Star
7
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
8
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Overwrite] or [Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
9
Press the 4 button.
The images processed with the filter are saved.
183
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 184 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To Select Toy Camera, High Contrast, Fish-eye, Brightness or Miniature Filter
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose a digital filter you want to use.
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.
6
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to adjust the effect.
5
Toy Camera
High Contrast
Fish-eye
Brightness
Miniature
Four-way controller
( 4 )
Weak
Weak
Weak
Dark
Upper
Default Setting
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Upper and lower
Four-way controller
( 5 )
Strong
Strong
Strong
Bright
Lower
7
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
8
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Overwrite] or [Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
9
Press the 4 button.
The images processed with the filter are saved.
184
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 185 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Using the Ink Rubbing Filter
You can edit the image to look like an ink rubbing.
The Ink Rubbing Filter cannot be used on the following images.
• Movies or images taken at
F
(Digital Panorama) or (Report) modes
• Images that have recorded pixels of h , h
, l , or m
• Images taken with other cameras
An error message appears in step 4.
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image you want to edit.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select
(Ink Rubbing Filter).
Ink Rubbing Filter
Creates an image similar to ink rubbing from original pictures
MENU Cancel OK
1/2
OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to choose the effect.
You can adjust the effect in five levels.
F Weak
G Standard
H Strong
6
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
5
185
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 186 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
7
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Overwrite] or [Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
8
Press the 4 button.
The images processed with the filter are saved.
• The processed images are saved with the recorded pixels of f /
• When there is little contrast between the object and the background,
.
the shape of the object may not be sharp depending on the conditions of the original image.
5
Creating a Collage Image
Make a collage image by placing captured images on a selected pattern.
The collage function cannot be used on the following images.
• Movies or images taken at F (Digital Panorama) or (Report) modes
• Images that have recorded pixels of l , or m
• Image taken with other cameras
An error message appears in step 4.
1
Enter Q mode and press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select
(Collage).
Collage
Creates a collage print page from saved image files
MENU Cancel OK
1/2
OK
186
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 187 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Press the 4 button.
The item selection screen appears.
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Backgnd.
Select image(s)
Create an image
3
M
MENU
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose the [Recorded
Pixels].
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
6
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to choose the recorded pixels.
You can choose from h or h .
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Backgnd.
Select image(s)
Create an image
3
M
MENU Cancel OK OK
7
Press the 4 button.
Returns to the item selection screen.
5
Selecting the Layout Pattern
8
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose the [Layout].
9
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Backgnd.
Select image(s)
3 M
Create an image
MENU Cancel OK OK
187
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 188 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
10
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose the pattern of layout.
You can choose from 3 patterns of layout ( / / ).
11
Press the 4 button.
Returns to the item selection screen.
5
Selecting the Background
12
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose [Backgnd.].
13
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
14
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to choose the background.
You can choose the white background or the black background.
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Backgnd.
Select image(s)
MENU Cancel
Create an image
3 M
OK OK
15
Press the 4 button.
Returns to the item selection screen.
188
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 189 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Laying Out the Image
• The collage function cannot be used on the following images.
Movies or images taken at
F
(Digital Panorama) or (Report) modes
Images that have recorded pixels of l , or m
Images taken with other cameras
These images do not appear as selectable items.
• If you select an image with a 16:9 aspect ratio, the black areas appear above and below the image.
16
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose
[Select image(s)].
17
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The images to be selected appear.
18
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to choose the image to include and press the 4 button.
The selected image is placed in the highlighted area in the guide.
The guide appears on the top left of the monitor.
19
Repeat step 18 to lay out the rest images.
20
Press the 9 button.
Returns to the item selection screen.
OK
5
189
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 190 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
Saving the Edited Image
21
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Create an image].
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Backgnd.
Select image(s)
Create an image
MENU
22
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for saving the image appears.
23
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Save].
Save
Cancel
24
Press the 4 button.
The edited image is saved.
The quality level of the image is fixed at
C
(Best).
3
M
OK OK
OK OK
190
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 191 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Red-eye Compensation
You can correct images where the flash has caused the subject to appear with red eyes.
• The red-eye compensation function cannot be used on panoramic images, movies or on images where red eyes cannot be detected on the camera. An error message appears in step 4.
• The red-eye compensation function can only be used with still pictures taken with this camera.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image you want to correct.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select Z
(Red-eye Compensation).
Red-eye Compensation 1/2
For compensating red-eye.
May not work due to the condition of the image
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Overwrite] or [Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
6
Press the 4 button.
The edited image is saved.
191
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 192 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
Adding a Frame (Frame Composite)
This function lets you add a decorative frame to still pictures. There are
6 frames already stored in the camera. You can copy the optional frames from the CD-ROM supplied with the camera.
The frame composite function cannot be used on the following images.
• Movies or images taken at
F
(Digital Panorama) or (Report) modes
• Images that have recorded pixels of l , or m
An error message appears in step 4.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image to which you want to add a frame.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select N
(Frame Composite).
Frame Composite 1/2
For composing an image with a frame. Select Overwrite or Save as to save
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The 12-frame display of the frame selection screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to choose a frame.
192
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 193 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
6
Press the y button.
The selected frame appears in single-image display.
You can choose another frame using either of the following operations.
Four-way controller (
45
)
Zoom button left ( f
)
Press to choose a different frame.
Press to return to the
12 frame display of the frame selection screen, and then perform step 5 to choose a different frame.
7
Press the 4 button.
The frame position and size adjustment screen appears.
You can adjust the image using either of the following operations.
Press to adjust the position of the image.
Cancel
Four-way controller
(
2345
)
Zoom button
( f / y )
Press to make the image larger or smaller.
8
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
9
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Overwrite] or [Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
10
Press the 4 button.
The edited image is saved with the recorded pixels of h (2048×1536)/ h (1920×1080).
5
193
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 194 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
Optional Frames
The optional frames are stored in the CD-ROM supplied with the camera.
To use these frames, copy them from the CD-ROM. These optional frames are deleted if the files on the built-in memory are deleted with a computer or if the built-in memory is formatted.
To Copy Frames
1
Remove the SD Memory Card from the camera.
If you leave the SD Memory Card in the camera, the frames will be copied onto the card, not into the camera’s built-in memory.
2
Connect the camera to the computer using the provided
USB cable (I-USB7).
Refer to “Connecting to a Computer” (p.241) for instructions
on connecting the camera to a computer.
3
When the device detection window opens, click [Cancel].
4
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
5
When the installer window opens, click [EXIT].
6
If there is not already a “FRAME” folder in the root directory of the camera (Removable Disk), create the folder.
7
Copy the desired files from the FRAME folder in the root directory of the CD-ROM to the FRAME folder on the camera (Removable Disk).
For information on working with files on your computer, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the computer.
8
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer and camera.
Refer to “Connecting to a Computer” (p.241) for instructions
on disconnecting the camera from a computer.
• Frames can be stored both in the built-in memory and on the SD Memory
Cards, but using large numbers of frames may slow down processing times.
194
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 195 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To Use a New Frame
The frames downloaded from the PENTAX website or other source can be used for adding a frame to pictures.
• Extract the downloaded frame and copy it to the FRAME folder in the built-in memory or the SD Memory Card.
• The FRAME folder is created when the SD Memory Card is formatted with this camera.
• For more information on downloading, refer to the PENTAX website.
Overlaying Your Original Frame on an Image
You can overlay your original frame (decorative frame) on an image.
You can select the type and color of an original frame and its position.Text can also be entered.
Frame
Type of original frame
Frame Type
Color
Blur/Edge Composite
F
(All sides)/
G
(Upper and lower sides)/
H
(Right and left sides)/
I (Upper side)/ J (Lower side)/ K (Left side)/ L (Right side)
White/Gray/Black/Pink/Pumpkin/Dark red/Dark green
Text Stamp
Available characters
Display Position
Color
A – Z, a – z, 0 – 9, Symbols
M
(Upper-left)/
N
(Upper-center)/
O
(Upper-right)/
P
(Lower-left)/
Q (Lower-center)/ R (Lower-right)
White/Gray/Black/Pink/Pumpkin/Dark red/Dark green
5
The Original Frame function cannot be used on images taken at
F (Digital Panorama) or (Report) modes, images recorded with h / h / l / m in [Recorded Pixels], or movies.
An error message appears in Step 4.
195
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 196 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
1
In Q mode, use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the image you want to add a frame to.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select
E
(Original Frame).
Original Frame 1/2
Available to make from the kind and color of a frame.
Available to enter text
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The original frame type selecting screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select an original frame type, and press the 4 button.
The frame setting screen appears.
Blur
6
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Frame Type], and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
Frame Type
Color
Text Stamp
Position Adjustment
Cancel Save
7
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select a frame type, and press the four-way controller ( 4 ).
8
Set [Color] in the same way as in Steps 6 and 7.
9
Adjust the position of the frame and image.
For details, refer to “To Adjust the Position of the Frame and an Image”
196
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 197 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
10
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Text Stamp], and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The Text Stamp screen appears.
When you do not enter characters, proceed to Step 12.
11
Set up the text stamp.
For details, refer to “To Set Up Text
Text Stamp
A
0
#
1
B C
2
+
3
D E
4
=
5
F
$
6
G
%
H
7
I
8 9
J
{
.
K
}
,
L M
( )
N O
[ ]
P Q
< >
R S
@
TUV
/ :
W
;
X
Finish
!
Y
?
Z
A/a
MENU
Delete One Character
Cancel OK Enter
12
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation dialog does not appear.
13
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Overwrite] or [Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
14
Press the 4 button.
The edited image is saved with the recorded pixels of f (2592×1944)/ (2592×1464).
To Adjust the Position of the Frame and an Image
1
Press the Green button.
The frame position adjustment screen appears.
Four-way controller
( 2345 )
Zoom button right
( y )
Zoom button left
( f
)
Press to adjust the position of the frame
Press to make the frame larger
Press to make the frame smaller
//
197
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 198 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
2
Press the Green button.
The image position adjustment screen appears.
Four-way controller
( 2345 )
Zoom button right
( y
)
Zoom button left
( f )
Press to adjust the position of the image
Press to make the image larger
Press to make the image smaller
3
Press the 4 button.
The screen returns to the original screen.
//
5
To Set Up Text Stamp
1
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select a character and press the 4 button.
The selected character is input.
Up to 52 characters can be input.
I button
Zoom button right
( y )
Zoom button left
( f
)
Green button
Press to switch between upper and lower case
Press to move the cursor to the right
Press to move the cursor to the left
Press to delete the character
Text Stamp
A
0
#
1
B C
2
+
3
D E
4
=
5
F
$
6
G
%
H
7
I
8 9
J
{
FR I ENDS
.
K
}
,
L M
( )
N O
[ ]
P Q
< >
R S
@
TUV
/ :
W
;
X
Finish
!
Y
?
Z
MENU
Delete One Character
Cancel OK OK
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select [Finish] and press the 4 button.
A/a
198
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 199 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Display
Position] and press the fourway controller ( 5 ).
Enter on this condition
Display Position
Color
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the display position and press the four-way controller ( 4 ).
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Color] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the color and press the four-way controller ( 4 ).
To View the Preview Screen
1
Press the Green button.
The preview screen appears.
5
2
Press the 3 button.
The screen returns to the original screen.
3
Press the 4 button.
199
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 200 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
Editing Movies
You can select a frame from the recorded movie to save as a still picture, divide a movie into two, or add a title picture to a movie.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the movie you want to edit.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [
(Movie Editing).
Movie Editing 1/2
Clipping still image from movie, movie segmentation, and to add title picture
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The Movie Editing selection screen appears.
Save as Still Image
To Save a Frame from a Movie as a Still Picture
5
Select [Save as Still Image] on the Movie Editing selection screen.
6
Press the 4 button.
The screen appears for selecting a frame to be saved as a still picture.
200
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 201 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
7
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to choose the frame you want to save.
2 Plays or pauses the movie
3 Stops the movie and returns to the first frame
4 Reverses the movie frame by frame
5 Advances the movie frame by frame
8
Press the 4 button.
The selected frame is saved as a still picture.
Select the image to save
100-0042
00:06
11
To Divide a Movie
5
Select [Divide Movies] on the movie edit selection screen.
6
Press the 4 button.
The screen for choosing the dividing position appears.
7
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to determine the dividing position.
2 Plays or pauses the movie
3 Stops the movie and returns to the first frame
4 Reverses the movie frame by frame
5 Advances the movie frame by frame
8
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog appears.
9
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Divide].
Select image for dividing position
11
100-0042
00:09
Divide
Cancel
5
201
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 202 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
10
Press the 4 button.
The movie is divided at the specified position, the two portions are saved as new files, and the original one is deleted.
The protected movies cannot be divided.
5
To Add a Title Picture to a Movie
5
Select [Adding title picture] on the movie edit selection screen.
6
Press the 4 button.
The screen appears for selecting a title picture.
7
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the desired title picture.
Only images available for use with the title picture are displayed.
8
Press the 4 button.
The screen appears for confirming the position of the title picture.
9
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the position.
A Adds the title picture to the beginning of the movie
B Adds the title picture to the end of the movie
Specify the position of title picture to add
10
Press the 4 button.
The selected picture is saved as the title picture.
Cancel
Protected movies cannot be added a title picture.
202
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 203 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• When a title picture is added to the beginning of a movie: When the movie is played back, the still picture is played back for three seconds, and then the movie is played back. The still picture registered as title picture is used as the thumbnail of the movie.
When a title picture is added to the end of a movie: When the movie is played back, the movie is played back, and then the still picture is played back for three seconds. The thumbnail of the movie is not changed by adding a title picture to the end of the movie.
• Only a still image with the same aspect ratio as the movie can be set as the title picture.
Copying Images and Sound Files
You can copy images and sound files from the built-in memory to the SD
Memory Card and vice versa. This function can only be selected when an SD Memory Card has been inserted in the camera.
Make sure that the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD Memory Card.
5
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select p
(Image/Sound Copy).
Image/Sound Copy
For copying images and sounds between the builtin memory and SD memory card
MENU Cancel OK
2/2
OK
3
Press the 4 button.
The copying method selection screen appears.
203
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 204 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
To Copy Files from the Built-in Memory to the SD Memory Card
All the images and sound files in the built-in memory are copied to the SD Memory Card at once. Before copying the images, make sure that there is enough space on the SD Memory Card.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [ 2}{ ].
SD
5
Press the 4 button.
All the images and sound files are copied to the SD Memory Card.
5
To Copy Files from the SD Memory Card to the Built-in Memory
Selected images and sound files from the SD Memory Card are copied to the built-in memory one at a time.
1
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [ {}2 ].
2
Press the 4 button.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select the image/sound file you want to copy.
204
4
Press the 4 button.
The selected image/sound file is copied to the built-in memory.
To copy other images or sound files, repeat Steps 4 to 7. Select
[Cancel] to exit the settings.
• If sound (Voice Memo) has been recorded with the image, the sound file is copied with the image.
• When a file is copied from the SD Memory Card to the built-in memory, it is assigned a new file name.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 205 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the Printing Service (DPOF)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) is the format for storing print order data on still pictures captured with a digital camera. Once the print order data has been stored, the pictures can be printed according to the DPOF settings using a DPOF-compatible printer or photo processing lab.
DPOF cannot be set for movies or sound-only files.
If the picture already has the date and/or time imprinted on it (p.136),
do not set [Date]
O
(On) in DPOF settings. If you select
O
(On), the imprinted date and/or time may overlap.
Printing a Single Image
Set the following items for each image.
Copies For setting the number of prints. You can print up to 99 copies.
Date Specify whether you want the date inserted on the print or not.
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select r (DPOF).
DPOF 2/2
For the print settings.
Useful when printing at a printing service
MENU Cancel OK OK
3
Press the 4 button.
The screen for selecting [Single Image] or [All Images] appears.
5
205
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 206 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Single Image].
Single Image
5
5
Press the 4 button.
The message [Applies DPOF settings to this image] appears.
To make DPOF settings for another image, use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select another image.
If DPOF settings have already been made for an image, the previous number of copies and date setting ( O (On) or P (Off)) will be displayed.
6
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to choose the number of copies.
Applies DPOF settings to this image
Copies
Date
00
Date
7
Use the Green button to choose whether to insert the date or not.
O (On) The date will be imprinted.
P (Off) The date will not be imprinted.
To continue setting DPOF print order
Date
Applies DPOF settings to this image
Copies
Date data, use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to choose another image and repeat steps 6 and 7.
01
8
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved and the screen shown in Step 4 reappears.
Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab, the date may not be imprinted on the pictures even if On is selected in the DPOF settings.
To cancel DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00] in step 6 and press the 4 button.
206
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 207 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Printing All Images
When you choose the number of copies and whether or not to insert the date, the settings are applied to all the images stored in the camera.
1
Select [All Images] in step 4 on p.206.
2
Press the 4 button.
The message [Applies DPOF settings to all images] appears.
3
Choose the number of copies and whether to insert the date or not.
Refer to steps 6 and 7 in “Printing a
Single Image” (p.206) for details of
how to make the settings.
Date
Applies DPOF settings to all images
Copies
Date
01
4
Press the 4 button.
The settings for all the images are saved and the camera returns to the DPOF setting screen.
5
• The number of copies specified in the DPOF settings applies to all the images. Before printing, check that the number is correct.
• Settings for single images are canceled when settings are made with
[All Images].
207
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 208 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Recording Sound (Voice Recording Mode)
6Recording and Playing
Back Sound
You can record sound with the camera. The microphone is located on front of the camera. When recording sound, aim the microphone at the sound source to obtain the best sound quality.
Microphone/
Speaker
6
Setting Voice Recording
To use the Voice Recording function, register Voice Recording to the Green Button.
When the shooting mode is set to
9
(Green) Mode, [Green Button] settings cannot be configured on the [ A Rec. Mode] menu. To configure the settings, first switch to a mode other than
9
.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Green Button].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Voice
Recording] and press the 4 button.
Green Button
Green Mode
Voice Recording
Movie
Fn Setting
MENU Cancel
5
Press the 3 button.
The Voice Recording function is registered to the Green Button.
OK OK
208
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 209 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Recording Sounds
Shutter release button
Green Button
1
Press the Green button in A mode.
The camera enters Voice Recording mode. The remaining recordable time and the recording time of the current file appear on the display.
1 Recording time
2 Remaining recordable time
2
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording starts. The self-timer lamp and REC icon (red) flash during recording.
When the Green button is pressed during recording, an index is added to the current sound file.
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording stops.
Index
Stop
1 2
• If you press and hold down the shutter release button for more than one second in step 2, recording continues until you take your finger off the button. This is useful for recording short sounds.
• Sound is saved in WAVE monaural files.
• In
O
(Voice Recording) mode, pressing the 4 / W button only turns off the LCD and changes the display to Normal Display.
6
209
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 210 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Playing Back Sound
You can play back the sound files you made with Voice Recording.
f
/ y
button
Q button
Four-way controller
6
1
Press the Q button.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose a sound file to play back.
3
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ).
1 2
Playback starts.
1 Total file recording time
2 Playback time 00:00:00
0 0 : 0 1 : 3 0
The following operations can be performed during playback.
Four-way controller ( 2 ) Pauses playback
Zoom button (
Zoom button ( y f
)
)
Increases the volume
Reduces the volume
If there are no recorded indexes:
Four-way controller ( 4 ) Reverses playback
Four-way controller ( 5 ) Fast forwards playback
If there are recorded indexes:
Four-way controller ( 4 ) Plays back starting from the previous index
Four-way controller ( 5 ) Plays back starting from the next index
The following operations can be performed while playback is paused.
Four-way controller ( 2 ) Resumes playback
Four-way controller ( 4 ) Rewinds approx. 5 seconds
Four-way controller ( 5 ) Advances approx. 5 seconds
210
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 211 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
Playback stops.
6
211
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 212 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Adding a Voice Memo to Images
6
You can add a voice memo to your still pictures.
Recording a Voice Memo
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the still picture to which you want to add a voice memo.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select \
(Voice Memo).
Voice Memo 2/2
Attaches sound to images.
Recording is possible till the memory card is full
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
Recording starts.
100-0038
01:31:44
5
Press the 4 button.
Recording stops.
• A voice memo cannot be added to the image that already has a voice
memo. Delete the old voice memo (p.166) and record a new one.
•
A voice memo cannot be added to protected images (p.169).
212
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 213 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Playing Back a Voice Memo
f / y button
Q button
Four-way controller
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose the still picture with the voice memo that you want to play back.
U appears on images with voice memos in single-image display.
2
Press the four-way controller
( 2 ).
Playback starts.
6
Edit
The following operations can be performed during playback.
Zoom button ( y )
Zoom button ( f )
Increases the volume
Reduces the volume
3
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
Playback stops.
1
213
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 214 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Camera Settings
Formatting the Memory
Formatting deletes all the data on the SD Memory Card or the built-in memory.
Be sure to use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.
• Do not remove an SD Memory Card while it is being formatted.
This may damage the card and make it unusable.
• Formatting deletes protected images and any data recorded on the card with a computer or any camera.
• SD Memory Cards formatted on a computer or device other than this camera cannot be used. Be sure to format the card with the camera.
• To format the built-in memory, be sure to eject the SD Memory Card beforehand. Otherwise, the SD Memory Card will be formatted.
7
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Format].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Format] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Format].
Format
All data will be deleted
Format
Cancel
5
Press the 4 button.
Formatting starts.
When formatting is completed, the camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
OK OK
214
7Settings
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 215 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Changing the Sound Settings
You can adjust the volume of operation sounds and change the type of sound.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Sound].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Sound] screen appears.
Sound
Operation Volume
Playback Volume
Start-up Sound
Shutter Sound
Operation Sound
Self-timer Sound
Off
1
1
1
MENU
To Change the Operation Volume/Playback Volume
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select
[Operation Volume].
5
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to adjust the volume.
Set the volume to f to mute the start-up sound, shutter sound, operation sound, and self-timer sound.
6
Change [Playback Volume] in the same way as in steps 4 and 5.
To Change the Sound Type
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Start-up
Sound].
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the sound type.
Choose from [1], [2], [3], [4], [Off], or [USER].
7
215
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 216 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
7
Press the 4 button.
8
Set [Shutter Sound], [Operation Sound] and [Self-timer
Sound] in the same way as in steps 4 to 7.
9
Press the 3 button.
The screen returns to the [ W Setting] menu.
Changing the Sound (Using a Recorded Sound File)
You can use a sound recorded by the camera for sound settings.
The first two seconds of the selected sound file will be played as the [USER] sound.
1
Select [USER] in step 6 in “To Change the Sound Type”.
2
Press the 4 button.
The playback screen for the recorded sound files appears.
7
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select a sound file.
Play back the selected file to confirm.
Four-way controller ( 2 ): Plays back the first two seconds of the sound file.
Four-way controller ( 3 ): Stops playback.
4
Press the 4 button.
The selected sound is set as the [USER] sound.
5
Set [Shutter sound], [Operation Sound] and [Self-timer
Sound] in the same manner.
6
Press the 3 button.
The screen returns to the [ W Setting] menu.
The Sound settings are saved when the camera is turned off.
216
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 217 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Changing the Date and Time
You can change the initial date and time settings (p.49). You can also
set the style in which the date appears on the camera.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select
[Date Adjustment].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2013
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
4
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].
Depending on the initial setting or previous setting, [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd] may be displayed.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to choose the date and time display style.
Choose from [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2013
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
6
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to [24h].
7
217
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 218 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
7
7
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [24h] (24-hour display) or [12h] (12-hour display).
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2013
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
8
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame returns to [Date Format].
9
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Date].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2013
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
10
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to one of the following items depending on the date style set in step 5.
Month for [mm/dd/yy]
Day for [dd/mm/yy]
Year for [yy/mm/dd]
The following operations and screens use [mm/dd/yy] as an example.
The operations are the same even if another date style has been selected.
11
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to change the month.
Date Adjustment
Date Format mm/dd/yy 24h
Date
Time
01/01/2013
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
12
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to the day field. Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to change the day. After changing the day, change the year in the same manner.
218
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 219 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
13
Change the time in the same way as in steps 8 to 12.
If you selected [12h] in step 7, the setting switches between am and pm corresponding to the time.
14
Press the four-way controller
( 3 ) to select [Settings complete].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2013
Time 00:00
Settings complete
OK OK MENU Cancel
15
Press the 4 button.
The date and time settings are saved and the screen returns to the [ W Setting] menu.
When you press the 4 button in step 15, the camera clock is reset to 00 seconds. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 00 seconds.
Setting the Alarm
You can set the alarm to ring at a specified time.
You can choose whether the alarm will ring at the same time every day or only once at the set time.
Setting the Alarm
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Alarm].
7
219
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 220 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The Alarm screen appears.
Alarm
Alarm
Time
Off
00:00
14:14
7
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
4
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the alarm.
Choose from [Off], [Once], or [Everyday].
6
Press the 4 button.
7
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to the [Time] field.
8
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to the hour field.
9
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to change the hour, then press ( 5 ).
The frame moves to the minute field.
Change the minutes in the same manner.
10
Press the 4 button.
11
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Settings complete].
12
Press the 4 button.
When the alarm is set to [Off], the settings are saved and the screen returns to the [ W Setting] menu.
Check that [Alarm] is set to P (Off).
When the alarm is set to [Once] or [Everyday], [Alarm is set] is displayed and the power turns off.
MENU Exit
Setting
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
1/4
01/01/2013
Standard
English
220
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 221 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Checking the Alarm
1
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Alarm] on the [ W Setting] menu.
Check that [Alarm] is set to O (On).
2
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The Alarm screen appears.
Check the alarm frequency and time.
Alarm
Alarm
Time
Once
14:25
14:14
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
3
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
Turning the Alarm Off
The Clock mode screen appears and the alarm rings for one minute when the set time is reached while the camera is turned off.
You can stop the alarm by pressing any button on the camera while the alarm is ringing.
WED
• The alarm will not ring if the camera is on when the set time is reached.
• Even if an alarm is set, the alarm will not ring while interval shooting is being performed.
7
Setting the World Time
The date and time selected in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.49) and
“Changing the Date and Time” (p.217) serve as the
W ( Hometown) date and time. By using the world time function, you can display the time in a city other than the Hometown ( X Destination). This is useful when taking pictures in a different time zone.
221
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 222 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
7
To Set the Destination
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [World Time].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [World Time] screen appears.
World Time
Select Time
Destination
New York
DST
DST Hometown
New York
MENU
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select X (Destination).
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Destination] screen appears. The city that is currently selected blinks on the map.
6
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to change the Destination city.
The current time, location and time difference of the selected city appear.
Destination
City
DST
New York
TimeDif.
14:25
+0:00
MENU Cancel OK OK
7
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [DST].
8
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O (On) or P (Off).
Select O (On) if the Destination city uses daylight saving time.
9
Press the 4 button.
The [World Time] setting is saved.
222
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 223 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
10
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
Select
W
(Hometown) in step 4 to set the city and DST setting for the
Hometown city.
To Display the Time of the Destination (Select Time)
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [World Time].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [World Time] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Select Time].
World Time
Select Time
DST Destination
London
Hometown
New York
DST
MENU
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
6
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select X (Destination) or W (Hometown).
X Displays the time of the Destination city
W Displays the time of the Hometown city
7
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
World Time
Select Time
Destination
London
Hometown
New York
MENU Cancel
DST
DST
OK OK
7
223
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 224 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
8
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
When X (Destination) is selected in step 6, the X icon appears on the display to indicate that the destination date and time are displayed in A mode.
P
38
7
Setting the Text Size on the Menu
You can set the text size of the item selected with the cursor on the menu to [Standard] (normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Text Size].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the text size.
Select from [Standard] or [Large].
Setting
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
1/4
01/01/2013
Standard
Large
MENU Exit OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
224
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 225 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Changing the Display Language
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc. are displayed.
The camera supports the following languages: English, French,
German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Japanese, Danish,
Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian,
Thai, Korean, and Chinese (traditional and simplified).
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select
[Language/ ].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Language/ ] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select the language.
7
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The menus and messages are displayed in the selected language.
225
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 226 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
7
Changing the System for Naming Folders
You can change the system for naming the folders for storing images.
When the naming system is set to the date, pictures are saved in separate folders by the date they were taken.
Choice
Date
(Default)
PENTX
_USER
The name of the folder xxx_mmdd (3-digit folder number_month day)
* xxx_ddmm (3-digit folder number_day month) when the date format is set to [dd/mm/yy]
A folder is made by day, and the images and sound files of the day are saved in the folder. xxxPENTX (xxx is the 3-digit folder number)
Up to 9999 images are saved in the same folder. xxxAAAAA (xxx is the automatically given 3-digit folder number, and AAAAA is the 5-digit letters that you entered)
Up to 9999 images are saved in the same folder.
Image taken on April 1 with the folder name setting set to [Date] created.
A folder with the name
“100_0401” is created.
The images are saved in the “100_0401” folder.
Image taken on April 8 with the folder name setting set to [Date] created.
A folder with the name
“101_0408” is created.
The images are saved in the “101_0408” folder.
Image taken on April 10 with the folder name setting set to [PENTX] created.
A folder with the name
“102PENTX” is created.
The images are saved in the “102PENTX” folder.
Image taken on April 15 with the folder name setting set to [PENTX] created.
A new folder is not created.
The images are saved in the “102PENTX” folder.
DCIM DCIM DCIM DCIM
100
100_0401
100
100_0401
101
101_0408
• Up to 900 folders can be created.
• Up to 9999 images or sounds can be saved in a folder.
100
100_0401
101
101_0408
102
102PENTX
100
100_0401
101
101_0408
102
102PENTX
226
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 227 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Selecting a Rule for Naming Folders
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Folder Name].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
Setting
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
Date
PENTX
Auto
2/4
OK OK MENU Cancel
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the rule for naming folders.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Naming the Folder Yourself
You can name the folder in which to save images.
You can enter up to five numbers and letters.
The 5-digit name is displayed after the 3-digit folder number.
1
Select [_USER] in step 4 in “Selecting the Rule for Naming
Folders”.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The folder naming screen appears.
“_USER” has already been entered.
Folder Name
A B C D
3
E
4
F
5
G
6
H
7
I
8
J
0 1 2
K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
9
U S E R
MENU Cancel OK Enter
7
227
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 228 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
3
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select the letter to enter, and press the 4 button.
The first letter is fixed and the cursor moves to the second letter.
4
Repeat step 3 and enter the remaining letters.
5
Press the four-way controller ( 4 ) while “A” is selected, or press
( 35 ) while “_” is selected.
The frame moves to [Settings complete].
Folder Name
A
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
0
B
1
C
2
D
3
E
4
F
5
G
6
H
7
I
8
J
9
K L M
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
P A R T Y
OK OK
6
Press the 4 button twice.
The folder name is fixed, and returns to the [ W Setting] menu.
• You can move the cursor by pressing the zoom button.
• The name of the folder that was set is displayed in the [ R Setting] menu.
7
Changing the Video Output Format
When you connect the camera to AV equipment, choose the appropriate video output format (NTSC or PAL) for taking and playing back images.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Video Out].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
228
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 229 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select a video output format.
Choose the video output format to match the output format of the AV equipment.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Setting
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
MENU Cancel
Date
MSC
NTSC
PAL
2/4
OK OK
Depending on the country or region, images and sound files may fail to be played back if the video output format is set differently from the one in use there. If this happens, change the video output format setting.
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment
Video Output Format by City
1
Selecting the HDMI Output Format
When you connect the camera to AV equipment with an HDMI cable, set the appropriate video output resolution for playing back images.
The default setting is [Auto].
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [HDMI Out].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
Setting
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
Date
MSC
Auto
1080i
720p
480p
2/4
MENU Cancel OK OK
7
229
7
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 230 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select an output format.
Choose the HDMI output format to match the output format of the AV equipment.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
The items on the pull-down menu vary depending on the selected Video output format.
To change the display, set the Video output format before setting the HDMI output format.
The table below shows the combinations of the Video output format and HDMI output.
Resolution
Video output format
NTSC PAL
Auto (The largest size that both the TV and camera support is automatically selected)
1080i (1920×1080i)
720p (1280×720p)
480p (1920×1080i) 576p (720×576p)
230
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 231 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the Eye-Fi Communication
You can automatically transfer images or movies to a computer or similar devices via wireless LAN using a commercially available Eye-Fi card.
P (Off).
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Eye-Fi].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select O or P .
O Turns on communication using an Eye-Fi card
P Turns off communication using an Eye-Fi card
4
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
MENU Exit
Setting
Date
MSC
NTSC
Auto
2/4
To establish an Eye-Fi communication, you first have to specify a wireless LAN access point and transfer destination on the Eye-Fi card.
For details on how to set up the card, refer to the operating manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.
7
231
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 232 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
7
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display
You can adjust the brightness of the display to 7 levels.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Brightness
Level].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to adjust the brightness.
F Dark
G Normal
H Bright
Setting
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
Date
MSC
NTSC
Auto
2/4
MENU Exit
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
The display appears with the set brightness.
232
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 233 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Using the Power Saving Function
You can save battery power by setting the display to dim automatically when no operation is performed for a fixed time. After the power saving function has been activated, the display returns to the ordinary brightness if any button is pressed.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Power Saving].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the time until the camera enters power saving mode.
Choose from [2min.], [1min.], [30sec.],
[15sec.], [5sec.] or [Off].
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
MENU Cancel
3/4
1
2 min.
min.
30
15 sec.
sec.
sec.
Off
OK OK
7
• Power Saving does not function in the following situations:
While taking pictures in the continuous shooting mode
In the playback mode
During movie recording
While the camera is connected to a computer
When using the AC adapter
While a menu is being displayed
In the (Digital Microscope) mode
• When no operation is performed after the camera is turned on, Power
Saving is activated only after 15 seconds elapse even if [5sec.] is set.
233
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 234 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
7
Setting Auto Power Off
You can set the camera to turn off automatically when no operation is performed for a fixed time.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Auto Power
Off].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the time until the camera turns off automatically.
Choose from [5min.], [3min.] or [Off].
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
3/4
5
3
5 sec.
min.
min.
Off
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Auto Power Off does not function in the following situations:
• While taking pictures in the continuous shooting mode
• While recording a movie
• During a slideshow or movie/sound playback
• While the camera is connected to a computer
• While recording sound in Voice Recording mode
• While images are being transferred in Eye-Fi communication.
234
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 235 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the Quick Zoom Function
While playing back images in Q mode, you can set whether to use
Quick Zoom to enlarge the playback image to 10× when pressing the y button once.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Quick Zoom].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to switch between
O (On) or P (Off).
O (On) The Quick Zoom is available.
P (Off) The Quick Zoom is not available.
MENU Exit
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
5sec.
3min.
3/4
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
7
235
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 236 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
7
Setting the Guide Display
Set whether to display the guide for the Capture Mode Palette or Playback Mode Palette.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Guide Display].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to switch between
O (On) or P (Off).
O (On) The mode guides are displayed.
P (Off) The mode guides are not displayed.
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
MENU Exit
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
Setting
5sec.
3min.
3/4
236
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 237 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Perform Pixel Mapping
Pixel mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting for defective pixels in the CCD sensor. Run the Pixel Mapping function if image dots always seem to be defective in the same place.
• Pixel Mapping is only available in
A
mode. Pixel mapping cannot be selected even if the [ W Setting] menu is displayed by pressing the 3 button in
Q
mode.
• When executing Pixel Mapping from
Q
mode, press the
Q
button once to enter A mode. Then press the 3 button and the fourway controller (
5
) to display the [
W
Setting] menu and select Pixel
Mapping.
• Pixel Mapping cannot be selected in Voice Recording mode.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode, and then press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Pixel Mapping].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Pixel Mapping].
Pixel Mapping
Checks the image sensor and corrects defective pixels
Pixel Mapping
Cancel
OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
Defective pixels are mapped and corrected.
7
When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to activate Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter kit K-AC117 (optional) or use a battery with ample capacity remaining.
237
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 238 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
7
Changing the Start-up Screen
You can choose the start-up screen displayed when the camera is turned on.
You can choose any of the following images as the start-up screen:
• The Guide Display Start-up Screen showing a guide to the shooting modes and buttons
• The pre-installed screen
• One of your own images (compatible images only)
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select ^
(Start-up Screen).
Start-up Screen
For setting a captured image as the Start-up
Screen
MENU Cancel
3
Press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to choose the image for the start-up screen.
Only images suitable for the start-up screen are displayed. You can also choose the pre-installed screen or the Guide Display Start-up Screen already stored in the camera.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
2/2
OK OK
238
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 239 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• Once the start-up screen has been set, it is not being deleted even if the original image is deleted or the SD Memory Card or built-in memory is formatted. However the image is deleted if you change the start-up screen after deleting the recorded image or formatting the memory.
• Select [Off] to hide the start-up screen.
• The start-up screen is not displayed when you turn the camera on in the playback mode.
• Movies or images taken at
F
(Digital Panorama) mode cannot be used for the start-up screen.
Resetting to Default Settings (Reset)
You can reset the camera settings to their defaults. Refer to “Default
Settings” (p.273) for the reset settings.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Reset].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Reset] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Reset].
Reset
Returns to default settings
Reset
Cancel
OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The settings return to the defaults.
The following settings are not affected by resetting:
• Date Adjustment
• World Time
• Language/
• Video Out
• The folder name that you created
7
239
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 240 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Displaying the Clock Mode
You can use the camera as a clock. With the camera turned off, press and hold down the 4 button to display the clock on the display.
7
1
Press and hold down the 4 button.
The camera turns on and the clock appears on the screen.
The camera turns off automatically after approximately 10 seconds.
Pressing the power switch turns the camera off immediately.
WED
4 button
240
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 241 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
8Connecting to a
Computer
Connecting to a Computer
By installing the software included on the provided CD-ROM on your computer and connecting the camera to your computer with the USB cable, you can transfer images and movies captured with your camera to the computer and then display and manage them. This section explains how to install the provided software and the other necessary preparations for enjoying the captured pictures and movies on your computer.
Provided Software
The following software is included in the provided CD-ROM.
Windows
• Image viewing/managing/editing software “MediaImpression
3.6.1 LE”
(Applicable languages: English, French, German, Spanish,
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Russian, Chinese
[traditional and simplified], Korean, and Japanese)
Macintosh
• Image viewing/managing/editing software “MediaImpression 2.2 LE”
(Applicable languages: English, French, German, Spanish,
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Russian, Chinese
[traditional and simplified], Korean, and Japanese) 8
It is recommended to use the optional AC adapter kit K-AC117 when
the camera is connected to a computer (p.38). If the battery runs out
of power while images are being transmitted to a computer, the data may be lost or damaged.
241
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 242 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
System Requirements
The following system requirements must be met for you to fully enjoy the images and movies captured with the camera on your computer.
Windows
8
OS
CPU
Memory
Hard Disk Space
Graphics
Monitor
Others
Windows ® XP(SP3), Windows Vista ® , Windows ® 7,
Windows ® version.
8
• The OS must be preinstalled and updated to the latest
Intel ® Pentium or equivalent
(Intel ® Core
® IV 1.6 GHz, AMD Athlon or higher recommended)
TM XP 1800+,
TM 2 Duo E6300, AMD Athlon TM 64 X2 5000+,
512 MB minimum (2 GB or higher recommended)
300 MB minimum (1 GB or higher recommended)
Intel ® GMA X3100/NVIDIA GeForce ® MX440/ATI Radeon TM
9200, with 128MB video memory, or equivalent
(Intel ® GMA 4500HD/NVIDIA GeForce
Radeon TM
® 8600GT/ATI
HD 3800, with 256 MB video memory, or higher recommended)
1024 × 768 pixels, 16-bit color or higher
CD-ROM drive
USB port as standard equipment
* Operation is not guaranteed on all computers meeting the system requirements.
* The system requirements describe the minimum environment for playing movies.
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me and
Windows NT/Windows 2000 are not supported.
242
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 243 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Macintosh
OS
CPU
Memory
Hard Disk Space
Graphics
Monitor
Others
Mac OS X (Ver.10.4, 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8)
• The OS must be preinstalled and updated to the latest version.
PowerPC G4 800 MHz processor or equivalent
(Intel © Core TM 2 Duo, or higher recommended)
512 MB minimum (1 GB or higher recommended)
300 MB minimum (1 GB or higher recommended)
NVIDIA GeForce © FX 5200 Ultra with 64MB video memory, or equivalent
(Intel © GMA 950/NVIDIA GeForce © 7300GT/ATI Radeon TM
X1600, with 128 MB video memory, or higher recommended)
1024 × 768 pixels, 16-bit color or higher
CD-ROM drive
USB port as standard equipment
* Operation is not guaranteed on all computers meeting the system requirements.
* The system requirements describe the minimum environment for playing movies.
8
243
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 244 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Installing the Software
Windows
Install the image viewing/managing/editing software (MediaImpression
3.6.1 LE).
8
• Make sure your Windows PC meets the system requirements before installing the software.
• When multiple accounts have been set up, log on with an account that has administrative rights before installing the software.
1
Turn your Windows PC on.
2
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
[Auto play] screen appears.
Click [PENTAX Software Installer], and then click [Yes].
If the installer screen does not appear
Display the installer screen following the steps below.
1) Double-click [My Computer] on the desktop.
2) Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
If you are using Windows XP
The “MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE” installer screen appears.
3
Click [ArcSoft].
The “Choose Setup Language” screen appears.
244
4
Choose a language, and click [OK].
The setup screen appears.
Follow the on-screen guidance to install the software.
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 245 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
5
Click [Finish].
“MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE” installation is complete.
6
Click [Exit] on the installation screen.
The window closes.
Macintosh
Install the image viewing/managing/editing software (MediaImpression
2.2 LE).
1
Turn your Macintosh on.
2
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
4
Double-click the [Pentax Software Installer] icon.
The “MediaImpression 2.2 LE” installer screen appears.
5
Click [ArcSoft].
The setup screen appears.
Follow the on-screen guidance to install the software.
8
245
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 246 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
6
Click [Close].
“MediaImpression 2.2 LE” installation is complete.
7
Click [Exit] on the installation screen.
The window closes.
Product Registration on the Internet
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration.
8
If your computer is connected to the Internet, please click [Product
Registration] on the setup screen after the language selection screen is displayed.
The world map screen shown on the right for Internet Product Registration is displayed. Click the displayed country or region and then follow the instructions to register your product.
Only customers in countries and regions displayed on the software installation screen can register their products on the Internet Product
Registration.
246
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 247 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Setting the USB Connection Mode
Set the device to which the camera is connected with the USB cable.
Make sure to set the USB connection mode before connecting your camera to the computer. You cannot perform the following setting if the camera is already connected to your computer with the USB cable.
1
Turn your camera on.
2
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [ W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller ( 5 ) once.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select
[USB Connection].
4
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
A pull-down menu appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [MSC].
Setting
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
Date
MSC
PTP
Auto
2/4
OK OK MENU Cancel
6
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
7
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
Proceed to the following pages depending on your computer.
1
1
8
247
8
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 248 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
MSC and PTP
MSC (Mass Storage Class)
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected to the computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard for controlling USB devices with this driver.
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage Class, you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without installing a dedicated driver.
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP without installing a device driver.
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the camera to your computer.
248
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 249 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Connecting to a Windows PC
Connecting the Camera and Your Windows PC
Connect your camera to the Windows PC using the provided USB cable
(I-USB7).
1
Turn your Windows PC on.
2
Turn your camera off.
3
Connect your camera to the Windows PC using the USB cable.
Connect the terminal of the USB cable with arrow mark facing the front side of the camera.
4
Turn your camera on.
The “AutoPlay” screen appears.
If the “AutoPlay” screen does not appear, follow the steps in “When the
“AutoPlay” Screen Does Not Appear” (p.251).
We recommend using the optional AC adapter kit K-AC117 when the
camera is connected to the computer (p.38). If the battery runs out of
power while images are being transmitted to the computer, the image data may be lost or damaged.
The power lamp is lit while the camera is connected to a PC, whereas it blinks while the card is being accessed.
8
249
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 250 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Transferring Images
Transfer the images captured with the camera to your Windows PC.
If there is no SD Memory Card in the camera, the images stored in the built-in memory will be transferred to your Windows PC.
5
Click [Import media files to local disk].
The “MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE” starts.
6
Set up [Destination Folder].
8
7
Select the image/s you want to copy, then click [Import Selected].
The selected images are copied to the PC.
* To select two or more images, select them while pressing the Ctrl key.
250
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 251 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
8
Click [Done].
When the “AutoPlay” Screen Does Not Appear
5
Double-click the
[MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE] icon on the desktop.
6
Click [PhotoImpression].
7
Click [Import].
8
Specify [Get Media From].
8
251
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 252 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
If the SD Memory Card has a volume label, the volume label name appears instead of [Removable Disk]. A new unformatted SD Memory
Card may show the manufacturer’s name or model number.
9
Set up [Destination Folder].
8
10
Select the image/s you want to copy, then click [Import Selected].
The selected images are copied to the PC.
* To select two or more images, select them while pressing the Ctrl key.
11
Click [Done].
Images are stored in folders named by the shooting date (“XXX_0808” for August 8. “XXX” is a three-digit number.).
If [PENTX] is selected for [Folder Name] in the [ W Setting] menu, a folder named “XXXPENTX” (XXX is a three-digit folder number) is displayed.
If [_USER] is selected for [Folder Name], “xxxAAAAA” (xxx is a threedigit folder number, AAAAA is the 5-digit letters that you entered) is displayed. The images are stored there.
252
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 253 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Disconnecting the Camera from Your Windows PC
1
Click the [Safely Remove
Hardware] icon in the task bar.
2
Click [Eject xxx
(name of the camera)].
A message appears indicating that the hardware can be safely removed.
3
Disconnect the USB cable from your Windows PC and the camera.
• If the camera (removable disk) is being used by an application such as
“MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE”, the camera cannot be disconnected until the application is closed.
• The camera will automatically switch to the playback mode when the USB cable is disconnected from your Windows PC or the camera.
8
253
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 254 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Starting “MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE”
“MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE” lets you view, edit, manage, search for, share, and print images.
1
Double-click the [MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE] icon on the desktop.
“MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE” starts and the main window appears.
Media Window Interface
A B
8
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.
A PhotoImpression
You can view or manage still images. For example, you can import, edit and print images.
B VideoImpression
You can view or manage movies. For example, you can import and edit movies.
254
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 255 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
PhotoImpression
A B
C
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.
A Views
Displays the configuration of folders or groups sorted by your favorites or a detected person.
B Preview Area
Displays the contents of the selected folder or sorted group.
C Actions
This panel provides editing/managing functions, such as an importing, editing, movie making.
8
255
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 256 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Viewing Images
1
Click [PhotoImpression] or
[VideoImpression] from the main window.
2
Select and click the folder or the group containing the image you want to view.
Images are displayed.
8
3
Select and double-click the image you want to view.
The selected image is displayed with the viewer.
With the viewer, you can enlarge/ reduce the display size of the image or edit it and so on. You can also play back movies or sound files.
Double-click the image to view it at full screen.
256
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 257 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Details on How to Use “MediaImpression 3.6.1 LE”
You can find more information on how to use “MediaImpression
3.6.1 LE” by using the help pages.
1
Click [Help] from [Menu] on the menu bar.
The help screen appears.
2
Click the desired topic.
An explanation is displayed.
8
257
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 258 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Connecting to a Macintosh
Connecting the Camera and Your Macintosh
Connect your camera to the Macintosh using the provided USB cable
(I USB7).
1
Turn your Macintosh on.
2
Turn your camera off.
3
Connect your camera to the Macintosh using the USB cable.
Connect the terminal of the USB cable with arrow mark facing the front side of the camera.
8
4
Turn your camera on.
The camera is recognized as [NO_NAME] on the desktop.
We recommend using the optional AC adapter kit K-AC117 when
the camera is connected to the computer (p.38). If the battery runs out
of power while images are being transmitted to the computer, the image data may be lost or damaged.
258
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 259 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• If the SD Memory Card has a volume label, the volume label name appears instead of [NO_NAME]. A new unformatted SD Memory Card may show the manufacturer’s name or model number.
• The power lamp is lit while the camera is connected to a Macintosh, whereas it blinks while the card is being accessed.
Transferring Images
Transfer the images captured with the camera to your Macintosh.
If there is no SD Memory Card in the camera, the images stored in the built-in memory will be transferred to your Macintosh.
5
Double-click the [MediaImpression] folder inside the [Applications] folder.
6
Double-click the [MediaImpression 2.2 LE] icon.
“MediaImpression 2.2 LE” starts and the main browser window appears.
7
Set up [Destination Folder] and select [Subfolder Name].
8
8
Select the image/s you want to copy, then click [Import].
The selected image/s are copied to the PC.
259
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 260 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
9
Click [Done].
8
Disconnecting the Camera from Your Macintosh
1
Drag [NO_NAME] on the desktop to the trash.
If the SD Memory Card has a volume label, drag the icon of that name to the trash.
2
Disconnect the USB cable from your Macintosh and the camera.
• If the camera (removable disk) is being used by an application such as “MediaImpression 2.2 LE”, the camera cannot be disconnected until the application is closed.
• The camera will automatically switch to the playback mode when the USB cable is disconnected from your Macintosh or the camera.
260
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 261 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Starting “MediaImpression 2.2 LE”
“MediaImpression 2.2 LE” lets you view, edit, manage, search for, share, and print images.
1
Double-click the [MediaImpression] folder inside the [Applications] folder.
2
Double-click the [MediaImpression 2.2 LE] icon.
“MediaImpression 2.2 LE” starts and the main browser window appears.
Media Window Interface
B
A
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.
A Media browser tool
You can view images, movies, or play back audio files.
B Edit/Managing tool
You can edit or manage images. For example, you can import, edit or print images.
8
261
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 262 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Media Browser Interface
B
A
8
C
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.
A Views
Displays the configuration of folders in your computer. When you browse a folder, the contents of the folder appear in the media thumbnail pane.
B Preview Area
Displays the contents of the selected folder or the results of the most recent search (the file or folder that matches the search item).
C Actions
This panel provides editing/managing functions, such as an importing, editing, movie making.
262
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 263 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Viewing Images
1
Click [Pictures], [Videos], or [All Media] from the main window.
2
Select and click the folder containing the image you want to view in the folder pane.
Images are displayed in the media thumbnail pane.
3
Select and double-click the image you want to view in the media thumbnail pane.
The selected image is displayed with the viewer.
With the viewer, you can enlarge/reduce the display size of the image or edit it and so on. You can also play back movies or sound files.
Details on How to Use “MediaImpression 2.2 LE”
You can find more information on how to use “MediaImpression 2.2 LE” by using the help pages.
1
Select [ArcSoft MediaImpression Help] from [Help] on the menu bar.
The help screen appears.
2
Click the desired topic.
An explanation is displayed.
8
263
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 264 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Transferring Images Using an Eye-Fi Card
8
You can automatically transfer images or movies to a computer or similar devices via wireless LAN using a memory card that is equipped with the wireless LAN (Eye-Fi card) function.
1
Specify the wireless LAN access point and transfer destination on the Eye-Fi card.
For details on how to set up the card, refer to the operating manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.
2
Turn the camera off.
3
Insert an Eye-Fi card that has been set up.
4
Turn the camera on.
5
Set [Eye-Fi] in the [ W Setting] menu to O (On).
The images are transferred automatically. For details on how to set up
the camera, refer to “Setting the Eye-Fi Communication” (p.231).
The following icons appear on the display.
During Eye-Fi communication. The camera is communicating or searching for the access point when
[Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication waiting. The camera is not communicating when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication prohibited. When [Eye-Fi] is set to P (off).
Eye-Fi version error. The version of the Eye-Fi card is out of date or the card is write-protected.
• Not available for Endless Memory mode.
• Run the latest firmware on your Eye-Fi card.
264
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 265 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• Copy the install file of Eye-Fi Manager stored on the card to your computer before you format the card.
• Do not use an Eye-Fi card, or set [Eye-Fi] to
P
(Off) in a location where wireless LAN devices are restricted or prohibited, such as on planes
(since images are transferred via wireless LAN).
• If you insert an older version Eye-Fi card in the camera, an error message appears.
• Images are not transferred in the following cases:
When available wireless LAN access points are not found.
When the battery level is low ( (yellow) or (red) is indicated).
• Voice recording sound files cannot be transferred.
• We recommend that you use an AC adapter (optional) when you transfer a large number of images because this often requires long transferring times.
• While images are being transferred, the Auto Power Off does not function.
• If you transfer large-sized files, such as a movie, the temperature inside the camera increases and the camera may be automatically turned off to protect the circuit.
• To transfer images via wireless LAN, use of an access point, an
Internet environment, and configuration are required. For details, refer to the Internet website (http://www.eye.fi).
• For details on how to use an Eye-Fi card, refer to the operating manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.
• If you have a problem with the Eye-Fi card, contact the manufacturer of the card.
• The camera is equipped with a function that sets Eye-Fi communication on or off, however, this does not guarantee availability of all the functions on the Eye-Fi card.
• Use of the Eye-Fi card is permitted only in the country where you purchased the card. Follow the laws of that country.
8
265
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 266 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
9
Functions Available for Each Shooting
Mode
√ : Can be set. ×: Cannot be set. ⎯ : Settings and changes are not applied.
Shooting Mode
Function
Zoom button Zoom operation
I button
Face Detection On
Smile Capture
Self-portrait Assist / Selfportrait Assist + Smile Capture
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
Face Detection Off
,
Auto a
Flash Off b
Flash On c Auto + Red-eye d Flash On + Red-eye
9
Standard g Z Self-timer j c
Continuous Shooting/
Burst Shooting hi
Remote Control k Interval Shoot l Auto Bracketing
Focus Mode
[ A Rec.
Mode] menu
= Standard q Macro
1cm Macro
3 Pan Focus s
Infinity z
Manual Focus
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF
Setting
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
AE Metering
Sensitivity
AUTO ISO Range
EV Compensation
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
Blink Detection
*1
Sharpness/Saturation
(Tone Adjustment)/Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light b
√ *2 √ *3 √ *3 √ *4 √ *3 √ *4
√ √ √ √
√ √ √ √
√
√
√
√
√ *33 √ *33 √ *33 × √ *33 ×
× √ √ √
√ √ × ×
√ √ √ √
√ √ √ ×
√ √ × ×
√ √ √ ×
√ √ √ √
√ √ √ √
×
A A C
√ × ×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
×
√ √ √ √
√ √ √
√ √ ×
√ √ √ √
√ √ √ √
√ √ √ √
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √
√ √ √ √
√
√
√
√
× *9 √ √ √ × *9 × *9
√ *11 √ *11 √ *11 √ *12 √ *11 √ *12
√ √ √ × *20 √ × *20
× *22 √ √ √ × *22 × *22
× *23 √ √ √ *24 √ √ *24
√ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ × √ ×
× *26 √ √ × *26 × *26 × *26
√ √ √ × *27 √ × *27
√ √ √ × *29 √ × *29
× *31 √ √ √ √ √
× *8 √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ × *8 √ × *8
√ √ √ × *8 √ × *8
√
√
×
√
√
√
√ √ √ × *8 √ × *8
√ √ √ × *8 √ × *8
√ √ √ √ √ √
×
√
×
×
√
√
×
√
×
× *32 √ √ √ × *32 × *32 a b B
\ U K
√ *3
√
√
√ *33
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
× *9
√ *11
√
× *22
√
√
√
× *26
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
× *32
√
√
√ c R
B
√ *3 √ *5
√ ×
√ ×
√ *33 ×
√
√
√
√
√
× × *8
√ ×
√ √
×
√
×
×
√
√ ×
× *32 √
√
√
√
√
√ × *25
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ ×
× *9 √
×
×
√ *11 × *13
√ √
× *22 √
√ √
√
√
×
√
×
×
√
√
×
√
× *26 √
√ √
√ √
√
√
√
√
√ × *25
√ × *8
9Appendix
266
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 267 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
X c Q e S F N 9
Shooting Mode
×
√
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
√
×
√
√ *33 √ *33 × √ *33 × √ *33 × √ *33
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
√ *6 √ *3 √ *3 √ √ *3 √ *3 √ *6 √ *7
√ √ × √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ ×
√ √
√ √
√ √
√ √
√ √
√ √
√ √
√ √
√ √
√ √
√ √
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
×
×
×
√
√
×
√
√
√
×
√ × *32 × *32 × *32 √
√
×
√
× √
√
×
×
√
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ ×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
*22 ×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
*22 ×
√
×
×
×
×
×
×
√
×
√
*22
√
×
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
×
×
√
√
×
×
√
×
√ √ × *9 × *9 × *9 √ √ √ × *10
× *14 × *15 √ *11 √ *11 √ √ *16 × *17 × *18 × *19
√ √ √ × *21
√ × *22 × *22
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
× *8
× *8
√
√
√
√ × *26 × *26 × *26 √
× *27 √ √ × *28 √
× *30
√
√
√
√
√ √ × *23 √ √ *24 √ × *23
√ √
√ √
×
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
×
*25
*25
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
×
√
√
√
*8 ×
√
√
√
*8
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
*8
×
×
*26 × *26
√ × *27
*30
√
√ × *8
√
×
×
⎯
*31
*8
√ × *25
√
√
√
×
×
√
√
×
√
√
√
×
√ × *32 × *32
√ × *8
× × *9
√ × *8
Zoom operation
Face Detection On
Smile Capture
Self-portrait Assist / Self-portrait
Assist + Smile Capture
Face Detection Off
, Auto a
Flash Off b
Flash On c
Auto + Red-eye d Flash On + Red-eye
9
Standard g Z
Self-timer
Continuous Shooting/ j c
Burst Shooting hi
Remote Control k Interval Shoot l Auto Bracketing
=
Standard q
Macro
1cm Macro
3 Pan Focus s
Infinity z
Manual Focus
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
AE Metering
Sensitivity
AUTO ISO Range
EV Compensation
D-Range Setting
AF Setting
Pixel Track SR
*1
Blink Detection
Sharpness/Saturation
(Tone Adjustment)/Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light
Function
Zoom button
I
button
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
Focus Mode
[ A Rec.
Mode] menu
9
267
9
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 268 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
*1 Movie SR is used for movies, while
Pixel Track SR is used for still pictures.
*2 Flowers cannot be detected when using Digital Zoom or Intelligent Zoom.
*3 Optical zoom is always possible, digital zoom and intelligent zoom cannot be used if the Sensitivity selection is ISO 3200/6400.
*4 Before shooting only optical zoom and digital zoom are possible, during shooting only digital zoom is possible.
*5 Only optical zoom and intelligent zoom are possible, digital zoom cannot be used.
*6 Only optical zoom is possible, digital zoom and intelligent zoom cannot be used.
*7 Only optical zoom and digital zoom are possible, intelligent zoom cannot be used.
*8 Fixed to P (Off)
*9 Fixed at Natural
*10 Fixed at Bright
*11 Fixed to f / when the
Sensitivity selection is ISO 3200/6400.
*12 Set in [Movie] on the [
A
Rec. mode] menu
*13 Fixed to h
*14 Fixed to h for individual pictures, and fixed to f for composite images.
*15 Fixed to f /
*16 Fixed to i for individual pictures, and fixed to f for composite
3 images.
*17 Fixed to h / h
*18 Fixed to V
*19 Fixed to g
*20 Fixed to C (Best) equivalent
*21 Fixed to D (Better)
*22 Fixed to F
*23 Fixed to
J
(Multi)
*24 W (Automatic Tracking AF) is not available
*25 Fixed to O (On)
*26 Fixed to L (Multi-segment metering)
*27 Fixed to AUTO
*28 The sensitivity is fixed at its minimum setting
*29 Fixed at 80-800
*30 Fixed at 80-6400
*31 Fixed at ±0.0
*32 Fixed as standard
*33 Not available when the Macro Light is on
268
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 269 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Messages
Messages such as the following may appear on the display during camera operation.
Message
Battery depleted
Memory card full
The card memory is not enough to copy images/ sounds
Memory card error
The built-in memory is not formatted
Card is not formatted
Card is locked
Compression error
No image/sound
Movie recording stopped
Deleting
Camera cannot play this image and sound
Image folder cannot be created
Protected
Description
The battery is exhausted. Charge the battery using
The SD Memory Card is full and no more images can be saved.
Insert a new SD Memory Card or delete unwanted images.
Change the recorded pixels or quality level of recorded
Shooting and playback are impossible due to a problem with the SD Memory Card. You may be able to display or copy the images on the card using a computer.
The data within the built-in memory are damaged.
Format the built-in memory.
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is unformatted or has been formatted on a computer or other device and is not compatible with this camera. Format the SD Memory
The SD Memory Card is write-protected (p.7).
This message occurs when the camera fails to compress an image. Change the quality level or recorded pixels of the image and try shooting or saving it again.
There are no image or sound files on the SD Memory Card or the built-in memory.
This message appears when the internal temperature of the camera has exceeded normal operating limits while recording a movie.
This message appears when deleting an image or sound file.
You are trying to play back an image or sound in a format not supported by this camera. You may be able to play it back on another brand of camera or on your computer.
The largest file number (9999) has been assigned to an image in the largest folder number (999) and no more images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory Card
or format the card/built-in memory (p.214).
The image or sound file you are trying to delete is protected.
9
269
9
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 270 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Message
Data being recorded
Data being processed
Description
Displayed when you try to switch to Q mode while an image is still being recorded, or when the protect setting or DPOF setting is being changed. It disappears after the image is recorded or the setting is changed.
Displayed when the camera takes more than five seconds to display an image due to image processing, or when the
SD Memory Card or the built-in memory is being formatted.
Displayed if the built-in memory is full when saving a file.
Built-in memory full
No image to be processed
This image/sound cannot be processed
Displayed when there are no images or sound files.
Displayed for files that cannot be processed.
No card in the camera
Displayed if no SD Memory Card is inserted when “Image/
Sound Copy” is selected from the Playback Mode Palette and the OK button is pressed.
The built-in memory is not enough to copy images/sounds
Cannot process correctly
Not enough battery power remaining to activate Pixel Mapping
No more images can be selected
The camera will turn off to prevent damage from overheating
Displayed when there is insufficient built-in memory to perform copying.
Displayed when Red-eye Compensation processing fails.
Displayed when the battery is too low during Pixel Mapping.
Change the battery (p.34) or use the AC adapter kit
K -
Displayed when you select more than the maximum number of images.
Appears when the temperature inside the camera exceeds the highest limit.
270
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 271 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The camera will not turn on
No image appears on the display
The display is hard to see
The shutter will not release
The picture is dark when using the flash
The battery is installed incorrectly
Check orientation of the battery.
Reinsert the battery according to the + symbols in the battery
The battery is exhausted Charge the battery.
The camera is connected to a computer
The camera is connected to a TV
The display is off when the camera is connected to a computer.
The display is off when the camera is connected to a TV.
The display is set to off.
The brightness level of the display is set too dark
Power Saving function is on
The flash is charging
There is no available space on the SD Memory Card or in the built-in memory
Recording
The subject is too far away in a dark environment, such as a night scene
Press the 4 / W button to turn the display on.
Adjust the brightness level in
[Brightness Level] in the [ W Setting]
When the Power Saving function is on, the display automatically darkens after a certain amount of time. Press a button to return to the normal brightness level.
Select [Off] in [Power Saving] in the
[ W Setting] menu to turn the Power
Pictures cannot be taken while the flash is charging. Wait until charging is finished.
Insert an SD Memory Card with available space or delete unwanted
Wait until recording is finished.
The picture becomes dark if the subject is too far away.
Take pictures within the specified flash range.
9
271
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 272 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
9
Problem
The subject is not in focus
The flash does not discharge
Cause
The subject is difficult to focus on with autofocus
The subject is not in the focusing area
Remedy
The camera may have difficulty in focusing on such subjects as: low contrast subjects (a white wall, a blue sky, etc.), dark subjects, finelypatterned objects, rapidly-moving objects. It is also difficult to get proper focus when shooting through
shooting using the focus lock, or \
Locate the desired subject in the focus frame (focusing area) in the center of the display. If it is difficult to do so, first lock the focus on the desired subject (focus lock), and then move the camera to recompose.
Set to , (Auto) or b (Flash On)
The flash mode is set to a (Flash Off)
The Drive Mode is set to j (Continuous Shooting), c (Burst Shooting), or l
(Auto Bracketing); the Focus Mode is set to s (Infinity); or the Shooting
Mode is set to d (Movie),
(Underwater Movie),
S
(Fireworks) or
(Digital Microscope).
The flash does not discharge in these modes.
Very occasionally, static electricity may cause camera to malfunction.
In this case, remove the battery and install it again. If the camera is then working properly, you can continue using the camera.
272
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 273 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Default Settings
The table below lists the factory default settings.
The meaning of the indications for menu items with a default setting is explained below.
Last Memory Setting
Yes : The current setting (last memory) is saved when
No the camera is turned off.
: The setting returns to the default setting when the camera
*
— is turned off.
: The setting depends on the [Memory] setting (p.149).
: N/A
Reset Setting
Yes : The setting returns to the default setting with the Reset
No
—
: The setting is saved even after reset.
: N/A
[ A Rec. Mode] Menu Items
Item
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
AE Metering
Sensitivity
AUTO ISO Range
EV Compensation
Recorded Pixels
Movie SR
Interval
Shoot
Interval
Total Time
Start Delay
Default Setting
(Shooting mode: A )
Bright g
(4288×3216)
D
(Better)
F (Auto)
J (Multiple)
O (On)
O (On)
L
(Multi-segment)
AUTO (80-800)
80-800
±0.0
M
(1280×720/30 fps)
O (On)
1 min.
10 min.
In 0 hr. 0 min.
Last Memory
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
*
Yes
Yes
Yes
*
*
*
*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reset
Setting Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
9
273
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 274 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
9
Item
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
Pixel Track SR t Interval
Interval Sh
Number of Shots
Start Delay
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Face Detection
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
Focus Mode
Zoom Position
MF Position
White Balance
Sensitivity
EV Compensation
AE Metering
Digital Zoom
DISPLAY
File No.
Green Button
Sharpness
Saturation
Tone Adjustment
Contrast
Date Imprint
IQ Enhancer
Macro Light
Default Setting
(Shooting mode: A )
P (Off)
Last Memory
Setting
Yes
Reset
Setting Page
Yes
P (Off)
P (Off)
0 min. 10 sec.
2
In 0 hr. 0 min.
O (On)
O (On)
O (On)
P (Off)
O
(On)
P (Off)
P (Off)
P (Off)
P (Off)
P
(Off)
P (Off)
P (Off)
P (Off)
O (On)
P
(Off)
O (On)
Green Mode
G
(Normal)
G (Normal)
G
(B&W)
G
(Normal)
P (Off)
O (On)
P (Off)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
274
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 275 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
[ W Setting] Menu Items
Item
Operation Volume
Playback Volume
Start-up Sound
Shutter Sound
Operation Sound
Self-timer Sound
Date Format (Date)
Date Format (time)
Date
Time
Alarm
Time
Select Time
Destination (City)
Destination (DST)
Hometown (City)
Hometown (DST)
Text Size
Language/
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Default Setting
3
3
Off
1
1
1
According to initial setting
24h
1/1/2013
According to initial setting
P (Off)
0:00
Same as W
Hometown
According to initial setting
P (Off)
According to initial setting
P (Off)
Standard
According to initial setting
Date
MSC
According to initial setting
Auto
P (Off)
G
5 sec.
3 min.
P (Off)
O (On)
Cancel
Last
Memory
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reset
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes *1
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
Page
9
275
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 276 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Item Default Setting
Delete All
Pixel Mapping
Format
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel
*1 Except the folder name that you created
9
Playback Mode Palette Items
Item
Interval
Screen Effect
Sound Effect
Image Rotation
Small Face Filter
Ink Rubbing Filter
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Background
Select image(s)
Digital Filter e Blur
Edge Composite
Frame Composite
Movie Ed g Save as Still Image
Divide Movies
Adding title picture
Red-eye Compensation
Recorded Pixels
Default Setting
3 sec.
Wipe
On
Normal
Approx. 7%
3 h / h
Quality Level
Cropping
Image/Sound Copy
Voice Memo
White
⎯
B&W/Sepia
All sides/White
All sides/White
Default1
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Depending on the picture taken
Depending on the picture taken
Depending on the picture taken
Built-in memory →
SD Memory Card
⎯
Last
Memory
Setting
⎯
⎯
⎯
Reset
Setting
⎯
⎯
⎯
Page
⎯
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
No
No
Last Memory
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Reset
Setting Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Yes
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
276
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 277 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Item
Single Image/Sound
All Images/Sounds
Single Image
All Images
Start-up Screen
Default Setting
Depending on the recorded image/sound
Depending on the recorded image/sound
Copies: 0
Date: Off
Default1
Last Memory
Setting
Reset
Setting Page
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Yes
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Key Operation
Item Function
Q button Operation Mode w / x button Zoom Position
Default Setting
Q Mode
Full wide-angle
2
Drive Mode
9
(Standard)
Four-way controller
3 Shooting Mode b (Auto Picture)
4 Flash Mode , (Auto)
3
5
button
Focus Mode
Menu Display
= (Standard)
Shooting mode:
[ A Rec. Mode] menu
Playback mode:
[ W Setting] menu
4 / W button
Information
Display
Standard
I button Operation Mode
Green Button Function Recall
Face Detection On
Green Mode
Last
Memory
Setting
⎯
*
*
Yes
*
*
Reset
Setting Page
⎯
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
⎯
*
*
Yes
⎯
Yes
Yes
Yes
9
277
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 278 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
List of World Time Cities
9
City
: indicates cities that can be set as either the Initial Setting (p.45)
Video Output Format: indicates the video output format of the city set as the Initial Setting.
Region
North
America
Central and South
America
Europe
Africa/West
Asia
City name
Honolulu
Anchorage
Vancouver
San Francisco
Los Angeles
Calgary
Denver
Chicago
Miami
Toronto
New York
Halifax
Mexico City
Lima
Santiago
Caracas
Buenos Aires
Sao Paulo
Rio de Janeiro
Lisbon
Madrid
London
Paris
Amsterdam
Milan
Rome
Copenhagen
Berlin
Prague
Stockholm
Budapest
Warsaw
Athens
Helsinki
Moscow
Dakar
Algiers
Johannesburg
Video output format
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
Region
Africa/West
Asia
East Asia
Oceania
City name
Istanbul
Cairo
Jerusalem
Nairobi
Jeddah
Tehran
Dubai
Karachi
Kabul
Male
Delhi
Colombo
Kathmandu
Dacca
Yangon
Bangkok
Kuala Lumpur
Vientiane
Singapore
Phnom Penh
Ho Chi Minh
Jakarta
Hong Kong
Beijing
Shanghai
Manila
Taipei
Seoul
Tokyo
Guam
Perth
Adelaide
Sydney
Noumea
Wellington
Auckland
Pago Pago
Video output format
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
278
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 279 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Main Specifications
Type
Number of effective pixels
Image sensor
Number of recorded pixels
Sensitivity
File format
Quality level
Storage media
Fully automatic compact digital still camera with built-in zoom lens
Approx. 14 megapixels
1/2.3 inch CCD
Still g
6
(4288×3216),
(3072×2304), j (3216×3216), i (4224×2376),
(3072×1728), f (2592×1944),
(2592×1464), h (2048×1536), h
(1920×1080), l (1024×768), m (640×480)
* Fixed at f / in Digital SR mode.
* Fixed at h / h
in Frame Composite mode.
* Fixed at f in Digital Wide mode, however, the first frame uses h .
* Fixed at i for one frame in Digital Panorama mode.
* Fixed at h
in Digital Microscope mode.
* Fixed at f /
* Fixed at f /
when the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400.
in Burst Shooting mode.
* Fixed at V (1280×960) in Report mode.
Movie M (1280×720/30 fps), F (1280×720/15 fps)
G (640×480/30 fps), H (640×480/15 fps)
I
(320×240/30 fps),
J
(320×240/15 fps)
AUTO, Manual (ISO 80-6400)
* The sensitivity is fixed at AUTO (80-6400) in Digital SR mode.
Still JPEG (Exif 2.3), DCF 2.0, DPOF,
PRINT Image Matching III
Movie AVI (Motion JPEG), approx. 30 fps/15 fps, PCM system, monaural sound, Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction)
Sound Voice memo, voice recording: WAVE (PCM) system, monaural
Still C “Best”, D “Better”, E “Good”
Movie Fixed at C (Best) *Unchangeable
Built-in memory (approx. 97.0 MB), SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory
Card, SDXC Memory Card
9
279
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 280 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Recording Time
Still g j i
6 f h h
V l m
(4288×3216)
(3216×3216)
(4224×2376)
(3072×2304)
(3072×1728)
(2592×1944)
(2592×1464)
(2048×1536)
(1920×1080)
(1280×960)
(1024×768)
(640×480)
Built-in Memory
C
19 pictures
24 pictures
24 pictures
33 pictures
39 pictures
39 pictures
49 pictures
61 pictures
90 pictures
141 pictures
214 pictures
443 pictures
D
39 pictures
49 pictures
49 pictures
61 pictures
75 pictures
75 pictures
98 pictures
121 pictures
177 pictures
258 pictures
365 pictures
690 pictures
E
61 pictures
70 pictures
70 pictures
81 pictures
109 pictures
109 pictures
151 pictures
177 pictures
238 pictures
365 pictures
477 pictures
776 pictures
2 GB
SD Memory Card
C
394 pictures
487 pictures
487 pictures
653 pictures
778 pictures
778 pictures
975 pictures
1205 pictures
1756 pictures
2794 pictures
4098 pictures
8782 pictures
D
778 pictures
975 pictures
975 pictures
1205 pictures
1499 pictures
1499 pictures
1921 pictures
2364 pictures
3415 pictures
5122 pictures
6830 pictures
12294 pictures
E
1205 pictures
1397 pictures
1397 pictures
1617 pictures
2119 pictures
2119 pictures
2927 pictures
3415 pictures
4728 pictures
6830 pictures
8782 pictures
15368 pictures
• The image storage capacity is for reference only. The actual image storage capacity may vary depending on the SD Memory Card and the subject.
• V (1280×960) can only be set for recorded pixels when (Report) mode is set.
9 Movie/Sound
M
(1280×720/30 fps)
F
(1280×720/15 fps)
G
(640×480/30 fps)
H
(640×480/15 fps)
I
(320×240/30 fps)
J
(320×240/15 fps)
Sound
Built-in Memory
30 sec.
1min.
1min. 28 sec.
2min. 47 sec.
2min. 15 sec.
4min. 8 sec.
2 GB
SD Memory Card
10 min. 8 sec.
19 min. 42 sec.
29 min. 16 sec.
53 min. 55 sec.
44 min. 32 sec.
1 hr. 18 min. 48 sec.
26min. 30 sec.
8 hr. 44 min. 34 sec.
280
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 281 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• The above figures are based on our standard shooting conditions and may vary depending on the subject, shooting conditions and type of the SD Memory Card used.
• Recording can continue until the built-in memory or the SD Memory Card is full, or the size of the recorded movie reaches 2 GB (when using an SDHC card).
If recording stops at 2 GB, start recording again to continue to record the rest of the movie in blocks of 2 GB.
White balance
Lens
Auto, Daylight, Shade, Tungsten Light, Fluores. Light, Manual
Focal Length 5.0 - 25.0 mm
(approx. 28 mm - 140 mm in 35 mm equivalent focal length)
Aperture F3.5 (W) - F5.5 (T)
Lens Composition 11 elements in 9 groups (5 aspherical elements)
Optical zoom
Intelligent zoom
Zoom Type
5×
Electrically driven
6 / : approx. 7×, f / :approx. 8.3×, h : approx. 10.5×, h
: approx. 11.2×, l : approx. 20.9×, m : approx. 33.5× (when combined with optical zoom)
Digital zoom Max. approx. 6.7× (combines with 5× optical zoom to give zoom magnification equivalent to 33.5×)
Motion blur reduction Still Electronic shake reduction (Pixel Track SR),
Hi sensitivity shake reduction (Digital SR)
Movie Electronic movie shake reduction (Movie SR)
Display
Playback modes
Focus mode
2.7 inch wide-LCD, approx. 230,000 dots (AR coating (cover only))
Single-frame, 6-frame, 12-frame, Enlargement (max. 10×, scrollable),
Face Close-up Playback, Pet Close-up Playback, Folder Display,
Calendar Display, Sound Playback, Histogram Display, Bright and
Dark Area Compensation, Select & Delete, Slideshow, Resize,
Cropping, Image/Sound Copy, Image Rotation, Digital Filter, Original
Frame, Ink Rubbing Filter, Collage, Small Face Filter, Movie
Playback/Edit (Save as Still image, Divide, Adding title picture),
Frame Composite, Red-eye Compensation, Voice Memo, Protect,
DPOF, Start-up Screen
Autofocus, Macro, 1cm Macro, Pan Focus, Infinity, Manual Focus 9
281
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 282 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
9
Focus
Exposure control
Face detection
Pet detection
Shooting mode
Digital filter
Movie
Shutter speed
Built-in flash
Drive mode
Self-timer
Type
Focus range
(From lens face)
TTL contrast detection system by sensor
Multiple (9-point autofocus)/spot/automatic tracking AF changeable
Standard : 0.5 m - ∞ (Full zoom range)
Macro : 0.1 m - 0.6 m (Full zoom range)
1cm Macro : 0.01 m - 0.3 m (At the intermediate position of the zoom range)
* It is possible to switch to Infinity, Pan Focus and Manual Focus.
* Face Detection AF is available only when the camera recognizes the subject’s face.
Focus Lock
AE Metering
By half-pressing the shutter release button
Multi-segment metering, Center-weighted metering, Spot metering
EV Compensation ±2 EV (can be set in 1/3 EV steps)
Detection of up to 32 people’s faces (up to 31 face detection frames on the display), Smile Capture, Blink Detection, Self-portrait Assist,
Self-portrait Assist + Smile Capture
* Face Detection AE is available only when the camera detects the subject’s face.
Registering: 3, Detecting: 1
Auto Picture, Program, Night Scene, Movie, Underwater, Underwater
Movie, Landscape, Flower, Portrait, Digital Wide, Surf & Snow, Digital
SR, Kids, Pet, Sport, Fireworks, Candlelight, Night Scene Portrait,
Text, Food, Digital Panorama, Frame Composite, Report, Digital
Microscope, Green, Voice Recording (can be used when Fn Setting assigned)
B&W/Sepia, Toy Camera, Retro, Color (red, pink, purple, blue, green, yellow), Extract Color (red, green, blue), Color Emphasis (Sky Blue,
Fresh Green, Delicate Pink, Autumn Leaves), High Contrast,
Starburst (Cross, Heart, Star), Soft, Fish-eye, Brightness, Miniature
Continuous
Recording Time
Approx. 1 second - until built-in memory or SD Memory
Card is full (however, maximum size is limited to 2 GB)
1/1500 sec. - 1/4 sec., max. 4 sec. (Night Scene mode)
Modes
Flash Range
Auto, Flash Off, Flash On, Auto + Red-eye, Flash
On + Red-eye
Wide-angle: approx. 0.3 m - 3.9 m
(approx. 0.98 ft - 12.8 ft) (Sensitivity: in Auto condition)
Telephoto: approx. 0.3 m - 2.5 m
(approx. 0.98 ft - 8.2 ft) (Sensitivity: in Auto condition)
Single-frame, Self-timer (approx. 10 sec., approx. 2 sec.), Continuous
Shooting, Burst Shooting, Remote Control (3-sec Remote Control,
0 sec Remote Control), Interval Shoot, Auto Bracketing
Electronic control type, control time: Approx. 10 sec., 2 sec.
282
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 283 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Time function
Power source
Battery life
World Time
Clock Mode
Alarm
75 cities (28 time zones)
Clock display by holding down 4 / W button while camera is turned off (approx. 10 sec.)
Alarm with simultaneous display of the Clock mode at specified time
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI92, AC adapter kit (optional)
Image Storage
Capacity
Approx. 260 pictures
* Recording capacity shows approximate number of shots recorded during CIPA-compliant testing
(with display on, flash used for 50% of the shots, and 23°C or 73.4°F). Actual performance may vary according to operating conditions.
Interfaces
Video output format NTSC/PAL (monaural)
Waterproof and dustproof rating
Impact resistance rating
Dimensions
JIS waterproof grade 8 and JIS dustproof grade 6 (IP68) Continuous underwater picture-taking possible for 2 hours at depth of 10 m.
PENTAX drop test (1.5 m height onto a 5 cm thick plywood surface) complying with MIL-Standard 810F Method 516.5-Shock testing.
* Waterproof performance is not guaranteed if the camera is exposed to impact such as being dropped or hit.
* The camera is not guaranteed to be free of trouble or damages under every condition.
Approx. 115.5 (W) × 58.5 (H) × 28.5 (D) mm (excluding operating or protruding parts)
Weight
Accessories
Playback Time
Approx. 280 min.
Movie Recording
Time
Approx. 120 min.
* According to the results of in-house testing.
* According to the results of in-house testing.
Sound Recording
Time
Approx. 350 min.
* According to the results of in-house testing.
USB 2.0 (high-speed compatible) /PC/AV terminal /
HDMI terminal (Type D (Micro))
Approx. 146g (excluding battery and SD Memory Card)
Approx. 166g (including battery and SD Memory Card)
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery, Battery charger, AC plug cord, USB cable, Software (CD-ROM), Strap, Macro stand, Operating Manual,
Quick Guide
9
283
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 284 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Warranty Policy
9
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering, battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions, or modification by an unauthorized repair shop.
The manufacturer or its authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties, whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by non-authorized PENTAX service facilities.
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment or to the manufacturer. If there is no representative of the manufacturer in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing, please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the service station to proceed with the servicing.
284
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 285 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory rights.
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the warranty policy.
9
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European Union.
285
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 286 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
For customers in USA
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
9
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-
003 du Canada.
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material, which may require special handling. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
286
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 287 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Declaration of Conformity
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals
We: PENTAX RICOH IMAGING AMERICAS
CORPORATION
Located at: 633 17 Street, Suite 2600,
Denver, Colorado 80202, U.S.A.
Phone: 800-877-0155 Fax: 303-790-1131
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein complies with
47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.
Product Name: Digital Camera
Model Number: PENTAX WG-10
Contact person: Customer Service Manager
Date and Place: January, 2013, Colorado 9
287
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 288 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
9
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and
Used Batteries
1. In the European Union
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic equipment and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
Used electrical/electronic equipment and batteries must be treated separately and in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these products.
By disposing of these products correctly you will help ensure that the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health which could otherwise arise due to inappropriate waste handling.
If a chemical symbol is added beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in the battery at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery
Directive.
For more information about collection and recycling of used products, please contact your local authorities, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the products.
2. In other countries outside the EU
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard used products, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don’t purchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listed on the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.
288
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 289 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Index
Symbols
A Mode ...................... 17, 56
I button ..................... 53, 55
Q
Mode ..................... 17, 56
Q
button .................... 52, 54
[
Menu .................. 61, 273
[ W
9
Green Mode ................. 77
i
Delete ................. 151, 165
f / y
button ...................... 54
y Magnify ....................... 162
x
Tele ............................... 79
i 3-sec Remote Control ......97
h
w Wide ............................ 79
w /
x button ...................... 52
b Auto Picture ................. 75
A Night Scene ................. 81
B Night Scene Portrait ..... 81
C
Movie .......................... 141
Q
Surf & Snow ................. 88
\ Sport ............................. 88
c
Digital SR ................... 81
Kids ............................... 84
e Pet ................................ 85
R Program ....................... 76
S
Fireworks ..................... 81
B
Text ............................... 89
X Digital Wide ............. 102
F
a
Landscape ................... 70 b
Flower ........................... 70
Underwater ................ 139
K Food .............................. 70
Report ..........................71
Digital Microscope .........90
N
Candlelight ....................81
c
Portrait ..........................83
Numerics
1cm Macro ...................110
A
AC adapter .........................38
AE Metering .....................121
Alarm ...............................219
Auto + Red-eye c
Auto Bracketing a
AUTO ISO Range ............123
Auto Macro ......................113
Auto Picture Mode .............75
Auto Power Off ................234
Auto F
Auto
, (Flash) .................108
AV cable ..........................173
B
B&W/Sepia filter ...............180
Basic Mode ........................77
Battery Level Indicator .......37
Blink Detection ...........68, 129
Brightness filter ................180
Brightness Level ..............232
9
289
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 290 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
9
Built-in Memory ............... 203
Burst Shooting ................... 95
C
Calendar display .............. 155
Camera shake ............. 23, 80
Candlelight Mode .............. 81
Capture Mode Palette ....... 70
Changing volume ............ 215
Charging a battery ............. 33
Clock Mode ..................... 240
Collage ............................ 186
Color emphasis filter ........ 180
Color filter ........................ 180
Connecting to a TV .......... 172
Continuous Shooting ......... 95
Contrast ........................... 136
Copy ................................ 203
Cropping .......................... 177
D
Date Adjustment ........ 49, 217
Date Imprint ..................... 136
Daylight saving time .......... 48
Default Settings ............... 273
Delete all ......................... 168
Delete i
Deleting sounds ............... 166
Digital Filter ..................... 180
Digital Microscope Mode ... 90
Digital SR Mode ................ 81
Digital Wide Mode ........... 102
Digital Zoom ...................... 81
Display brightness ........... 232
Display Language ............ 225
Dividing movies ............... 201
290
DPOF settings .................205
D-Range Setting ..............125
Drive Mode ....94, 95, 99, 101
E
EV Compensation ............124
Extract color filter .............180
Eye-Fi ......................231, 264
F
Playback ...................163
Face Detection ...................71
Filters ...............................180
Fireworks Mode .................81
Fish-eye filter ...................180
Flash Mode ......................108
Flash Off
Flash On
Flash On + Red-eye
d (Flash) ..................108
Flower ................................70
Focus Assist ....................114
Focus Mode .....................110
Focusing ..........................110
Focusing Area ..................112
Folder display ..................154
Folder Name ....................226
Food ...................................70
Format .............................214
Four-way controller ......53, 55
Frame Rate ......................143
G
Green button ....................130
Green button
Green Mode .......................77
Guide Display ....................30
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 291 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
H
HDMI ............................... 229
High contrast filter ........... 180
Highlight Correction ......... 125
Histogram .......................... 30
Hometown ................. 48, 221
I
Image Rotation ................ 161
Image Storage Capacity .... 280
Image Tone ..................... 115
Image/Sound Copy .......... 203
Infinity
s ......................... 110
Initial Setting ...................... 45
Ink Rubbing Filter ............ 185
Installing a battery ............. 34
Installing the software ...... 244
Instant Review ........... 68, 130
Interval Movie Mode ........ 145
Interval Shoot
IQ Enhancer .................... 137
K
Kids Mode ......................... 84
L
Landscape ......................... 70
Language setting ....... 45, 225
M
Macintosh ........................ 243
Macro
q .......................... 110
Macro Light ...................... 138
Magnify y
Manual Focus \
Manual K
Mass Storage Class ........ 248
MediaImpression ............. 241
Memory ........................... 149
3 button .............. 52, 54
Miniature filter ..................180
Movie Editing ...................200
Function ....................144
MSC .................................248
Multi-segment metering
N
Night Scene Mode .............81
Mode ...........................81
Number of pixels ..............116
O
4 / W
Operating the Menus .........57
Original Frame .................195
P
Pan Focus
Panoramic Pictures ..........105
Pet Mode ...........................85
Photo processing lab .......205
Protocol ....................248
Pixel Mapping ..................237
Pixel Track SR .................126
Playback ..................151, 152
Playback (sound) .............210
Playing back movies ........152
Portrait Mode .....................83
Power Saving ...................233
Power switch ..........43, 52, 54
(shutter release button) ........................67
9
291
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 292 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
9
(shutter release button) ........................ 67
Product registration ......... 246
Program Mode ................... 76
Protect Z
Provided software ............ 241
PTP ................................. 248
R
Rec. Mode Menu ....... 61, 273
Recorded Pixels ...... 116, 143
Recording movies ............ 141
Red-eye reduction cd
Remote Control Unit .......... 97
Report ................................ 71
Reset ............................... 239
Resetting settings ............ 239
Resize ............................. 176
Retro filter ........................ 180
Rotating ........................... 161
S
Saturation ........................ 135
(movie) ..................... 200
Saving pictures by date ... 226
Saving settings ................ 149
SD Memory Card ............... 40
Select Time ..................... 223
Self-portrait Assist ............. 74
Self-timer g
Sensitivity ........................ 122
Setting Menu ............. 63, 275
Shadow Correction .......... 125
292
Sharpness ........................134
Shooting information ..........23
Shooting Mode ...................69
button ..............52, 54, 67
Slideshow ........................158
Small Face Filter ..............178
Smile Capture ....................72
Soft filter ...........................180
Sound settings .................215
Sound types .....................215
Specifications ...................279
Sport Mode ........................88
Standard =
Starburst filter ..................180
Start-up screen ................238
Strap ..................................32
Surf & Snow Mode .............88
System requirements .......242
T
Taking pictures underwater ................139
Text Mode ..........................89
Text Size ..........................224
Title picture of movie ........202
Tone Adjustment ..............135
Toy camera filter ..............180
U
Underwater Mode ............139
USB Connection ..............247
V
Video output format ...............228, 278
Voice Memo .....................212
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 293 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Voice Recording .............. 208
W
Dustproof .................. 139
White Balance ................. 119
Windows .......................... 242
World Time ...................... 221
Z
Zoom x / w
OPWG10201/ENG
9
293
WG10_OPM_ENG.book Page 294 Friday, February 1, 2013 5:30 PM
Cover_WG10_ENG.fm Page i Monday, February 4, 2013 4:04 PM
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD.
2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN
(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
FRANCE S.A.S.
(European Headquarters)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,
FRANCE
(HQ - http://www.pentax.eu)
(France - http://www.pentax.fr)
Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,
GERMANY
(http://www.pentax.de)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
UK LTD.
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
AMERICAS CORPORATION
633 17th Street, Suite 2600, Denver, Colorado 80202,
U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
CANADA INC.
PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough,
Berks SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING
CHINA CO., LTD.
1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,
CANADA
(http://www.pentax.ca)
23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang
Road, Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032, CHINA
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
OPWG10201-ENG Copyright © PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD. 2013
FOM 01.02.2013 Printed in Europe
Digital Camera
Operating Manual
To ensure the best performance from your camera, please read the Operating Manual before using the camera.
Preuzimanje
Javna poveznica ažurirana
Javna poveznica na vaš razgovor je ažurirana. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Javna poveznica dokumenta
Oglas